Subaru Forester 2.5 XS L.L. Bean 2005 Owner's Manual PDF
en
Summary of Content for Subaru Forester 2.5 XS L.L. Bean 2005 Owner's Manual PDF
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owners Man- ual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in excel- lent condition and to properly maintain the emission control system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its operation. For information not found in this Owners Manual, such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest SUBARU dealer. The information, specifications and illustrations found in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles previously sold. This Owners Manual applies to all models and covers all equipment, in- cluding factory installed options. Some explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
copyright 2004 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
This manual describes the following vehicle types.
* The illustrated vehicle is one of the FORESTER series.
HSF029AA
1
CONTINUED
Warranties
Warranties for U.S.A. All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of Ameri- ca, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the United States come with the following warranties:
SUBARU Limited Warranty Emission Control Systems Warranty Emissions Performance Warranty
All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions, is in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. Please read these warranties carefully.
Warranties for Canada All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU deal- er in Canada come with the following warranties:
SUBARU Limited Warranty Anti-Corrosion Warranty Emission Control Warranty
All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions, is in the Warranty and Service Book- let. Please read these warranties carefully.
This vehicle does not contain mer- cury devices or parts.
2
How to use this owners manual
Using your Owners manual Before you operate your vehicle, carefully read this manual. To protect yourself and extend the service life of your vehicle, follow the instructions in this manual. Failure to observe these instructions may result in se- rious injury and damage to your vehicle.
This manual is composed of fourteen chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief table of contents, so you can usually tell at a glance if that chapter contains the information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags This chapter informs you how to use the seat and seat- belt and contains precautions for the SRS airbags. Chapter 2: Keys and doors This chapter informs you how to operate the keys, locks and windows. Chapter 3: Instruments and controls This chapter informs you about the operation of instru- ment panel indicators and how to use the instruments and other switches. Chapter 4: Climate Control This chapter informs you how to operate the climate control. Chapter 5: Audio
This chapter informs you how to operate your audio system. Chapter 6: Interior equipment This chapter informs you how to operate interior equipment. Chapter 7: Starting and operating This chapter informs you how to start and operate your SUBARU. Chapter 8: Driving tips This chapter informs you how to drive your SUBARU in various conditions and explains some safety tips on driving. Chapter 9: In case of emergency This chapter informs you what to do if you have a prob- lem while driving, such as a flat tire or engine over- heating. Chapter 10: Appearance care This chapter informs you how to keep your SUBARU looking good. Chapter 11: Maintenance and service This chapter informs you when you need to take your SUBARU to the dealer for scheduled maintenance and informs you how to keep your SUBARU running properly. Chapter 12: Specifications This chapter informs you about dimension and capac- ities of your SUBARU.
3
CONTINUED
Chapter 13: Consumer information and Reporting safety defects This chapter informs you about Uniform tire quality grading standards and Reporting safety defects. Chapter 14: Index This is an alphabetical listing of all thats in this manu- al. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.
Safety warnings You will find a number of WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual. These safety warnings alert you to potential hazards that could result in injury to you or others. Please read these safety warnings as well as all other portions of this manual carefully in order to gain a bet- ter understanding of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.
A WARNING indicates a situation in which seri- ous injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.
A CAUTION indicates a situation in which injury or damage to your vehicle, or both, could result if the caution is ignored.
NOTE A NOTE gives information or suggestions how to make better use of your vehicle.
Safety symbol
You will find a circle with a slash through it in this man-
HSF019AA
4
ual. This symbol means Do not, Do not do this, or Do not let this happen, depending upon the context.
Vehicle symbols There are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Mark Name
CAUTION
Power door lock
Passengers windows lock
Fuel
Front fog lights
Parking lights
Hazard warning flasher
Cigarette lighter
5
CONTINUED
Engine hood
Seat heater
Child restraint top tether anchorages
Child restraint lower anchorages
Horn
Windshield wiper deicer
Wiper intermittent
Windshield wiper and washer
Rear window wiper and washer
Mark Name
Lights
Parking lights, tail lights, license plate light and instrument panel illumination
Head lights
Illumination brightness
Fan speed
Instrument panel outlets
Instrument panel outlets and foot out- lets
Foot outlets
Windshield defroster and foot outlets
Windshield defroster
Mark Name
6
Safety precautions when driving
Seatbelt and SRS airbag
All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury be- comes greater in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driver and all passengers in the vehicle should always wear seatbelts when the vehicle is moving. The SRS (Supplemental Re- straint System) airbag does not do away with the need to fasten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined protection in case of a serious accident. Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag.
The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy-
Outside mirror defogger
Rear window defogger
Air recirculation
Engine oil
Washer
Mark Name
7
CONTINUED
ment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full ve- hicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.
Carefully read the sections Seatbelts and *SRS air- bag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) in chap- ter 1 of this owners manual for instructions and pre- cautions concerning the seatbelt system and SRS air- bag system.
Child safety
Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a colli- sion, because the child will be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle.
While riding in the vehicle, infants and small children should always be placed in the REAR seat in an infant or child restraint system which is appropriate for the childs age, height and
weight. If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the REAR seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. Accord- ing to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating po- sitions than in the front seating positions. Nev- er allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.
Put children aged 12 and under in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk being injured from deployment is greater.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
Always use the child safety locks whenever a child rides in the rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opened the door and fell out. Refer to the Child safety locks section in chapter 2.
8
Always lock the passengers windows using the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power window. Refer to the Windows section in chapter 2.
Never leave unattended children in the vehi- cle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, tempera- ture in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to them.
Carefully read the sections Child restraint sys- tems,*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag), and Seatbelts in chapter 1 of this owners manual for instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint system, seatbelt system and SRS airbag system.
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monox- ide)
Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine ex- haust gas contains carbon monoxide, a color- less and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas from en- tering the vehicle.
Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.
Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a lengthy time while the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system always works properly.
If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive
9
CONTINUED
only with all windows fully open. Keep the rear gate closed while driving to
prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
Drinking and driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Alcohol in the bloodstream delays your reac- tion and impairs your perception, judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after drinking even if you drink just a little it will increase the risk of being involved in a serious or fatal accident, injuring or killing yourself, your passengers and others. In addition, if you are injured in the accident, alcohol may increase the severity of that injury. Please dont drink and drive.
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects all people differently, you may have consumed too much alcohol to drive safely even if the level of alcohol in your blood is below the legal limit. The safest thing you can do is never
drink and drive. However if you have no choice but to drive, stop drinking and sober up completely before getting behind the wheel.
Drugs and driving
There are some drugs (over the counter and prescription) that can delay your reaction time and impair your perception, judgment and at- tentiveness. If you drive after taking them, it may increase your, your passengers and other persons risk of being involved in a serious or fatal accident.
If you are taking any drugs, check with your doctor or pharmacist or read the literature that accompanies the medication to determine if the drug you are taking can impair your driving ability. Do not drive after taking any medications that can make you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you have a medical condition that requires you to take drugs, please consult with your doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your own health and well-be-
10
ing, we urge you not to take illegal drugs in the first place and to seek treatment if you are addicted to those drugs.
Driving when tired or sleepy
When you are tired or sleepy, your reaction will be delayed and your perception, judgment and attentiveness will be impaired. If you drive when tired or sleepy, your, your passengers and other persons chances of being involved in a serious accident may increase.
Please do not continue to drive but instead find a safe place to rest if you are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you should make periodic rest stops to refresh your- self before continuing on your journey. When possible, you should share the driving with others.
Modification of your vehicle
Your vehicle should not be modified. Modifica-
tion could affect its performance, safety or du- rability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or perfor- mance problems resulting from modification may not be covered under warranties.
Car phone/cell phone and driving
Do not use a car phone/cell phone while driv- ing; it may distract your attention from driving and can lead to an accident. If you use a car phone/cell phone, pull off the road and park in the safe place before using your phone. In some States/Provinces, only hands-free phones may legally be used while driving.
Driving with pets Unrestrained pets can interfere with your driving and distract your attention from driving. In a collision or sudden stop, unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown around inside the vehicle and hurt you or your passengers. Besides, the pets can be hurt under
11
CONTINUED
these situations. It is also for their own safety that pets should be properly restrained in your vehicle. Restrain a pet with a special traveling harness which can be se- cured to the rear seat with a seatbelt or use a pet car- rier which can be secured to the rear seat by routing a seatbelt through the carriers handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the front passengers seat. For further information, consult your veterinarian, local an- imal protection society or pet shop.
Tire pressures Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month and be- fore any long journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the val- ues shown on the tire placard.
Refer to the Tires and wheels section in chapter 11 for detailed information.
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severe- ly and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation,
and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.
California proposition 65 warning
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro- ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids in vehi- cles and certain components of product wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
14
9
12
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
13
10
11
Table of contents Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Keys and doors
Instruments and controls
Climate control
Audio
Interior equipment
Starting and operating
Driving tips
In case of emergency
Appearance care
Maintenance and service
Specifications
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Index
14
Illustrated index
Exterior
1 2 3 4 5
6
78910
11
HSF020BB
1) Engine hood (page 11-5) 2) Headlight switch (page 3-23) 3) Replacing bulbs (page 11-63) 4) Wiper switch (page 3-29) 5) Roof rails (page 8-17) 6) Door locks (page 2-6) 7) Tire pressure (page 11-44) 8) Flat tires (page 9-3) 9) Tire chains (page 8-13) 10) Front fog light button (page 3-
27) 11) Tie-down/Towing hooks (page
9-13)
15
CONTINUED
1
2
3
45 HSF021BB
1) Rear window defogger button (page 3-33)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-4) 3) Child safety locks (page 2-23) 4) Tie-down/Towing hook (page 9-
13) 5) Rear gate (page 2-27)
16
Interior Passenger compartment area
1 2 3
456 USF030BB
1) Lower anchorage for child re- straint system (page 1-45)
2) Seatbelt (page 1-14) 3) Moonroof (page 2-28) 4) Parking brake lever (page 7-34) 5) Front seat (page 1-2) 6) Rear seat (page 1-11)
17
CONTINUED
1
2
3
4 5 USF031BB
1) Cup holder (page 6-8) 2) Center console (page 6-5) 3) Glove box (page 6-5) 4) Cigarette lighter socket (page 6-
11) 5) Ashtray (page 6-14)
18
Instrument panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
89101112141516 13 USF032BB
1) Door locks (page 2-6) 2) Outside mirror switch (page 3-
37) 3) Light control lever (page 3-23) 4) Combination meter (page 3-7) 5) Wiper control lever (page 3-28) 6) Hazard warning flasher switch
(page 3-7) 7) Audio (page 5-2) 8) Gear shift lever (MT) (page 7-
12)/Selector lever (AT) (page 7- 15)
9) Climate control (page 4-2) 10) Cruise control (page 7-38) 11) Horn (page 3-40) 12) SRS airbag (page 1-53) 13) Tilt steering (page 3-39) 14) Fuse (page 11-60)/Coin tray
(page 6-7) 15) Hood lock release knob (page
11-5) 16) Power window (page 2-24)
19
CONTINUED
Light control and wiper control levers/switches
12 34
5
1
10
9 7 11
2
68
UGF064BB
1) Parking light switch (page 3-27) 2) Windshield wiper (page 3-29) 3) Mist (page 3-30) 4) Windshield washer (page 3-31) 5) Rear window wiper and washer
switch (page 3-31) 6) Wiper control lever (page 3-30) 7) Illumination brightness control
(page 3-26) 8) Light control lever (page 3-23) 9) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-23) 10) Headlight flasher High/Low
beam change (page 3-23) 11) Turn signal (for lane change)
(page 3-25) 12) Turn signal (page 3-25)
20
Combination meter U.S.-spec. models AT vehicles
XT
A B
0
20 20
40
60
80
100 120 140
km/h 160
180
200
220
40
60 80
100
120
140
1
0
x1000r/min
2
3 4
5
6
7
8
MPH
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
USF033BB
1) Fuel gauge (page 3-9) 2) Temperature gauge (page 3-10) 3) Speedometer (page 3-7) 4) Tachometer (page 3-8) 5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip
meter reset knob (page 3-7) 6) Odometer and trip meter (page
3-7) 7) Outside temperature indicator
(page 3-10) 8) Select lever position indicator
(page 3-20)
21
CONTINUED
X, XS, L.L.Bean
0
20
10
30
50 70
90
20
40
60
80 100
120
140 km/h
160
180
40
60
80
100
120
110
1
0
x1000r/min
2
3 4
5
6
7
8
MPH A B
1 2 3 4
78 6 5
USF037BB
1) Fuel gauge (page 3-9) 2) Temperature gauge (page 3-10) 3) Speedometer (page 3-7) 4) Tachometer (page 3-8) 5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip
meter reset knob (page 3-7) 6) Odometer and trip meter (page
3-7) 7) Outside temperature indicator
(page 3-10) 8) Select lever position indicator
(page 3-20)
22
MT vehicles
XT
A B0
20 20
40
60
80
100 120 140
km/h 160
180
200
220
40
60 80
100
120
140
1
0
x1000r/min
2
3 4
5
6
7
8
MPH
1 2 3 4
7 6 5
USF034BB
1) Fuel gauge (page 3-9) 2) Temperature gauge (page 3-10) 3) Speedometer (page 3-7) 4) Tachometer (page 3-8) 5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip
meter reset knob (page 3-7) 6) Odometer and trip meter (page
3-7) 7) Outside temperature indicator
(page 3-10)
23
CONTINUED
X, XS, L.L.Bean
A B 0
20
10
30
50 70
90
20
40
60
80 100
120
140 km/h
160
180
40
60
80
100
120
110
1
0
x1000r/min
2
3 4
5
6
7
8
MPH
1 2 3 4
7 6 5
USF038BB
1) Fuel gauge (page 3-9) 2) Temperature gauge (page 3-10) 3) Speedometer (page 3-7) 4) Tachometer (page 3-8) 5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip
meter reset knob (page 3-7) 6) Odometer and trip meter (page
3-7) 7) Outside temperature indicator
(page 3-10)
24
Canada-spec. models
AT vehicles
XT
0
20
20
40
60 80
100
120
140
MPH
40
60
80
100 120 140
160
180
200
220
240
1
0
x1000r/min
2
3 4
5
6
7
8
km/h A B
1 2 3 4
78 6 5
USF035BB
1) Fuel gauge (page 3-9) 2) Temperature gauge (page 3-10) 3) Speedometer (page 3-7) 4) Tachometer (page 3-8) 5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip
meter reset knob (page 3-7) 6) Odometer and trip meter (page
3-7) 7) Outside temperature indicator
(page 3-10) 8) Select lever position indicator
(page 3-20)
25
CONTINUED
X, XS, L.L.Bean
0
20
20
40
60
80
100
120
MPH
40
60
80 100
120
140
160
180
1
0
x1000r/min
2
3 4
5
6
7
8
km/h A B
1 2 3 4
7 6 58
USF039BB
1) Fuel gauge (page 3-9) 2) Temperature gauge (page 3-10) 3) Speedometer (page 3-7) 4) Tachometer (page 3-8) 5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip
meter reset knob (page 3-7) 6) Odometer and trip meter (page
3-7) 7) Outside temperature indicator
(page 3-10) 8) Select lever position indicator
(page 3-20)
26
MT vehicles
XT
0
20
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
MPH
40
60
80
100 120 140
160
180
200
220
240
1
0
x1000r/min
2
3 4
5
6
7
8
km/h A B
1 2 3 4
7 6 5
USF036BB
1) Fuel gauge (page 3-9) 2) Temperature gauge (page 3-10) 3) Speedometer (page 3-7) 4) Tachometer (page 3-8) 5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip
meter reset knob (page 3-7) 6) Odometer and trip meter (page
3-7) 7) Outside temperature indicator
(page 3-10)
27
CONTINUED
X, XS, L.L.Bean
0
20
20
40
60
80
100
120
MPH
40
60
80
100 120
140
160
180
1
0
x1000r/min
2
3 4
5
6
7
8
km/hA B
1 2 3 4
7 6 5
USF040BB
1) Fuel gauge (page 3-9) 2) Temperature gauge (page 3-10) 3) Speedometer (page 3-7) 4) Tachometer (page 3-8) 5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip
meter reset knob (page 3-7) 6) Odometer and trip meter (page
3-7) 7) Outside temperature indicator
(page 3-10)
28
Warning and indicator light
Mark Name Page
Seatbelt warning light 3-13
SRS airbag system warning light 3-13
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp
3-13
Charge warning light 3-14
Oil pressure warning light 3-15
AT OIL temperature warning light (AT vehicles) 3-15
or ABS warning light 3-15
or Brake system warning light 3-18
Door open warning light 3-19
All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT vehicles) 3-19
Low fuel warning light 3-19
Turn signal indicator lights 3-21
High beam indicator light 3-21
Security indicator light (if equipped) 2-17
Cruise control indicator light (if equipped) 3-21
Cruise control set indicator light (if equipped) 3-21
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light (if equipped)
3-20
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dy- namics Control OFF indica- tor light (if equipped)
3-16
Mark Name Page
29
CONTINUED
Tire changing tools
3
1
2 HSF027BB
1) Jack (page 9-19) 2) Jack handle (page 9-19) 3) Spare tire (page 9-3)
30
Cargo area cover
4 21
3 HSF018BB
1) Cargo area cover (page 6-16) 2) Cargo tie-down hook (page 6-
18) 3) Accessory power outlet (page 6-
9) 4) Shopping bag hook (page 6-18)
1-1
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Front seats .................................................... 1-2 Manual seat ....................................................... 1-3 Power seat (if equipped) .................................. 1-5 Lumbar support ................................................ 1-7 Head restraint adjustment ................................ 1-8 Active head restraint ........................................ 1-9
Seat heater (if equipped) .............................. 1-10 Rear seats ..................................................... 1-11
Head restraint adjustment ................................ 1-12 Folding down the rear seatback ...................... 1-13
Seatbelts ....................................................... 1-14 Seatbelt safety tips ........................................... 1-14 Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .............. 1-15 Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor
(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-16 Seatbelt warning light and chime .................... 1-16 Fastening the seatbelt ...................................... 1-16 Seatbelt maintenance ....................................... 1-29
Seatbelt extender ......................................... 1-29 Front seatbelt pretensioners ....................... 1-31
System monitors ............................................... 1-32 System servicing .............................................. 1-33 Precautions against vehicle modification ...... 1-34
Child restraint systems ................................ 1-35 Where to place a child restraint system ......... 1-37 Choosing a child restraint system .................. 1-38 Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR
seatbelt ............................................................ 1-39 Installing a booster seat ................................... 1-44
Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .... 1-45
Top tether anchorages ..................................... 1-50 *SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag) ........................................... 1-53 Vehicle with drivers and front passengers
SRS airbags and lap/shoulder restraints ..... 1-53 SRS frontal airbag ............................................ 1-57 SRS side airbag (if equipped) .......................... 1-65 SRS airbag system monitors ........................... 1-73 SRS airbag system servicing .......................... 1-75 Precautions against vehicle modification ...... 1-76
1-2
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbagsFront seats
Never adjust the seat while driving to avoid the possibility of loss of vehicle control and of personal injury.
Before adjusting the seat, make sure the hands and feet of rear seat passengers are clear of the adjusting mechanism.
Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If the front seat- backs are not used in the upright position in a collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious in- ternal injury or death.
Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recom- mend that ALL children (including those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly
HS1034BA
1-3
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the childs age, height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including for- ward facing child seat) in the REAR seats at all times. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat- ing positions than in the front seating posi- tions. For instructions and precautions con- cerning child restraint systems, see the Child restraint systems section in this chapter.
Manual seat Fore and aft adjustment
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to the desired position. Then release the lever and move the seat back and forth to make sure that it is securely locked into place.
HS1035BA
1-4
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Reclining the seatback
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the seatback to the desired position. Then release the lever and make sure the seatback is securely locked into place. The seatback placed in a reclined position can spring back upward with force when released. When operat- ing the reclining lever to return the seatback, hold it lightly so that it may be raised back gradually.
To prevent the passenger from sliding under the seatbelt in the event of a collision, always put the seatback in the upright position while the vehicle is in motion. Also, do not place ob- jects such as cushions between the passenger and the seatback. If you do so, the risk of slid- ing under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.
HS1036BA
HS1037BA
1-5
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
Seat height adjustment (drivers seat)
1) Turn the dial backward to lower the seat. 2) Turn the dial forward to raise the seat.
Use the adjusting dial to adjust the height of the seat.
Power seat (if equipped) Fore and aft adjustment
To adjust the seat forward or backward, move the con- trol switch forward or backward.
2 1
HS1038BB
US1117BA
1-6
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Seat cushion angle adjustment
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up or push down the front end of the control switch.
Seat height adjustment
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push down the rear end of the control switch.
US1118BA US1119BA
1-7
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
Reclining the seatback
To adjust the angle of the seatback, move the control switch forward or backward.
NOTE While adjusting the seatback, you can not at the same time adjust the seat position or the seat cushion angle and height.
Lumbar support
Pull the lever forward or backward. Pulling the lever forward will increase the amount of support for your lower back.
US1120BA HS1045BA
1-8
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Head restraint adjustment
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, push the head restraint down while press- ing the release button on the top of the seatback. The head restraint should be adjusted so that the cen- ter of the head restraint is closest to the top of the oc- cupants ears.
Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed because they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury in the event that
the vehicle is struck from the rear.
NOTE If the seatback is reclined rearward to the same level as the rear seat cushion with the head re- straint removed, a wide flat bed is made available.
1. Slide the front seat forward as far as possible. 2. Pull off the head restraint while pressing the re- lease button. 3. Recline the seatback rearward up to the lowest po- sition. Remember to reinstall the head restraint when- ever the seatback is raised back.
HS1039BA
HS1040BA
1-9
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
Never drive your car with the seats converted in a flat bed position. If you do so, occupants will have a greater chance of being injured even during simple deceleration, acceleration and cornering since no firm restraint will be avail- able for them.
Before you lie on the flat bed to take a rest, read the description Parking your vehicle in Chapter 7 carefully and follow the instructions.
Active head restraint
The front seats of your vehicle are equipped with ac- tive head restraints. They automatically tilt forward slightly in the event the vehicle is struck from the rear, decreasing the amount of rearward head movement and thus reducing the risk of whiplash. For maximum effectiveness the head restraint should be adjust so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of the occupants ears.
Each active head restraint is effective only when its height is properly adjusted and the user sits in the correct position on the seat.
Each active head restraint is designed to work only once. If your vehicle is involved in a rear-end collision, have an authorized SUBARU dealer inspect the active head restraints.
The active head restraints may not operate in the event the vehicle experiences only a slight impact in the rear.
The active head restraints may be damaged if they are pushed hard from behind or subjected to shock. As a result, they may not function if the vehicle suffers a rear impact.
HS1105BA
1-10
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Seat heater (if equipped)
HI Rapid heating LO Normal heating
The seat heater operates when the ignition switch is either in the ACC or ON position.
To turn on the seat heater, push the LO or HI posi- tion on the switch, as desired, depending on the tem- perature. Selecting the HI position will cause the seat to heat up quicker.
The indicator located on the switch comes on when the seat heater is in operation. When the vehicles in-
terior is warmed enough or before you leave the vehi- cle, be sure to turn the switch off.
There is a possibility that people with delicate skin may suffer slight burns even at low tem- peratures if he/she uses the seat heater for a long period of time. When using the heater, al- ways be sure to warn the persons concerned.
Do not put anything on the seat which insu- lates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, or similar items. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
NOTE Use of the seat heater for a long period of time
while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge.
When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine, paint thinner, or any similar materials.
HI
LO
US1507BB
1-11
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
Rear seats
Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. Do not put cushions or any other materials be- tween occupants and seatbacks or seat cush- ions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.
Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
HS1043BA
HS8005BA
1-12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Head restraint adjustment Rear windows side seating position
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, push the head restraint down while de- pressing the release button on the top of the seatback.
When the seats are not occupied, lower the head re- straint to improve rearward visibility.
Rear center seating position
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, push the head restraint down while press- ing the release button on the top of the seatback.
When the rear center seating position is occupied, place the head restraint in its highest position. When the rear center seating position is not occupied, lower the head restraint to improve rearward visibility.
HS1046BA
HS1106BA
1-13
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
Folding down the rear seatback 1. Lower the head restraints. 2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the release knob and then fold the seatback down.
To return the seatback to its original position, raise the seatback until it locks into place and make sure that it is securely locked.
After returning the rear seatback to its origi- nal position, make certain that the shoulder belts are fully visible.
Never allow passengers to ride on the folded rear seatback or in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury or death.
Secure lengthy items properly to prevent them from shooting forward and causing seri- ous injury during a sudden stop.
HS1047BA
HS1048BA
1-14
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Seatbelts
Seatbelt safety tips
All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury be- comes greater in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
All belts should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as ef- fective in preventing or reducing injury.
Each seatbelt is designed to support only one person. Never use a single belt for two or more persons even children. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.
Replace all seatbelt assemblies including re- tractors and attaching hardware worn by occu- pants of a vehicle that has been in a serious ac- cident. The entire assembly should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.
Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, espe-
cially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained. Be- cause children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deploy- ment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child re- straint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is ap- propriate for the childs height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (in- cluding forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat- ing positions than in the front seating posi- tions. For instructions and precautions con- cerning the child restraint system, see the Child restraint systems section in this chap- ter.
1-15
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
Infants or small children Use a child restraint system that is suitable for your ve- hicle. See information on Child restraint systems in this chapter.
Children If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating po- sitions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses the face or neck, adjust the shoulder belt anchor height (window- side seating positions only) and then if necessary move the child closer to the belt buckle to help provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to secure- ly place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips and not on the childs waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt cannot be properly positioned, a child restraint system should be used. Never place the shoulder belt under the childs arm or behind the childs back.
Expectant mothers
Expectant mothers also need to use the seatbelts. They should consult their doctor for specific recom- mendations. The lap belt should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips, not over the waist.
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) The drivers seatbelt has an Emergency Locking Re- tractor (ELR). The emergency locking retractor allows normal body movement but the retractor locks automatically during a sudden stop, impact or if you pull the belt very quick- ly out of the retractor.
HS1107AA
1-16
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retrac- tor (A/ELR)
Each passengers seatbelt has an Automatic/Emer- gency Locking Retractor (A/ELR). The Automatic/ Emergency Locking Retractor normally functions as an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/ELR has an additional locking mode Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode intended to secure a child re- straint system. When the seatbelt is once drawn out completely and is then retracted even slightly, the re- tractor locks the seatbelt in that position and the seat- belt cannot be extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor func- tions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.
When securing a child restraint system on the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt, the seatbelt must be changed over to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
When the child restraint system is removed, make sure that the seatbelt retracts fully and the retractor re- turned to the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode. For instructions on how to convert the retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to the ELR mode, see the Child restraint systems section in this chapter.
Seatbelt warning light and chime Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning de- vice at the drivers seat, as required by current safety standards. This device causes the seatbelt warning light on the instrument panel to light up when the ignition switch is turned to ON to remind the driver to wear the seat- belt. If the drivers seatbelt is not fastened, the warning light remains on and a warning chime sounds at the same time. The warning light stays illuminated until the driver fastens the seatbelt but the chime stops sounding after about six seconds.
Fastening the seatbelt
Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this can increase the risk or sever- ity of injury.
Keep the lap belt as low as possible on your hips. In a collision, this spreads the force of the lap belt over stronger hip bones instead of across the weaker abdomen.
Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the
1-17
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If the front seat- backs are not used in the upright position in a collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious in- ternal injury or death.
Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.
Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or behind the back. If an accident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity of injury.
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can become very hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sun- ny weather; they could burn an occupant. Do not touch such hot parts until they cool.
HS1049BA
1-18
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Front seatbelts 1. Adjust the seat position: Drivers seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright posi- tion. Move the seatback as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control. Front passengers seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the seat as far back as possi- ble. 2. Sit well back in the seat. 3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If the belt stops before reach- ing the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
HS1050BA
1-19
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. 6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.
Adjusting the front seat shoulder belt anchor height
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best suited for you. To lower the anchor height, push the release button and slide the anchor down. To raise the anchor height, slide the anchor up. Pull down on the anchor to make sure that it is locked in place. Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder belt passes over the middle of the shoulder without touching the neck.
5
6
HS1051BB
HS1052BA
1-20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
When wearing the seatbelts, make sure the shoulder portion of the webbing does not pass over your neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt an- chor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury dur- ing sudden braking or in a collision.
Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the button on the buckle. Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing
in the door.
Rear seatbelts (except rear center seatbelt) 1. Sit well back in the seat. 2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If the belt stops before reach- ing the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving a strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly again.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
HS1053BA
HS1050BA
1-21
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. 5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.
Adjusting the rear seat shoulder belt anchor height (window-side seating positions only)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best suited for you. To lower the anchor height, push the release button and slide the anchor down. To raise the anchor height, slide the anchor up. Pull down on the anchor to make sure that it is locked in place. Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder belt passes over the middle of the shoulder without touching the neck.
4
5
HS1051BC
HS1052BA
1-22
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
When wearing the seatbelts, make sure the shoulder portion of the webbing does not pass over your neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt an- chor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury dur- ing sudden braking or in a collision.
Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the button on the buckle. Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing
in the door.
Rear center seatbelt
A) Center seatbelt tongue plate B) Connector (tongue) C) Connector (buckle) D) Center seatbelt buckle
HS1053BA
A
B C
D
US1527BC
1-23
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
Fastening the seatbelt with the webbing twisted can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. When fastening the belt after it is pulled out from the retractor, especially when inserting the connectors tongue plate into the mating buckle (on right hand side), always check that the webbing is not twisted.
Be sure to fasten both tongue plates to the re- spective buckles. If the seatbelt is used only as a shoulder belt (with the connectors tongue plate not fastened to the connectors buckle on the right hand side), it cannot properly restrain the wearer in position in an accident, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.
HS1054BA HS1055BA
1-24
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
0
Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the recess of the ceil- ing.
1. Remove the connector (tongue) plate from the holder located at the front of the recess by pulling the connector (tongue) plate rearward.
2. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the overhead re- tractor.
HS1065CA HS1057BA
1-25
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
A) Seatbelt comfort guide
3. Pass the seatbelt through the seatbelt comfort guide located beside the head restraint.
4. After confirming that the webbing is not twisted, in- sert the connector (tongue) attached at the webbing end into the buckle on the right hand side until a click is heard. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
A
HS1058BC HS1059BA
1-26
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate in the center seatbelt buckle marked CENTER on the left hand side until it clicks.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. 7. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.
HS1060BA
6
7
HS1061BC
1-27
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the release button of the center seatbelt buckle (on the left hand side) to unfasten the seatbelt.
NOTE When the seatback is folded down for greater car- go area, it is necessary to disconnect the connec- tor.
0
1. Insert a key or other hard pointed object into the
HS1062BA
HS1063BA
HS1064BA
1-28
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
slot in the connector (buckle) on the right hand side and push it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will disconnect from the buckle.
2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt. You should hold the webbing end and guide it back into the retrac- tor while it is rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plates in the recess in the retractor and then insert the con- nector (tongue) plate into the slot located at the front of the recess.
Do not allow the retractor to roll up the seat- belt too quickly. Otherwise, the metal tongue plates may hit against the trim, resulting in damaged trim.
Have the seatbelt fully rolled up so that the tongue plates are neatly stored. A hanging tongue plate can swing and hit against the trim during driving, causing damage to the trim.
HS1065BA
HS1066BA
1-29
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
Seatbelt maintenance To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the belts because this could seriously affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments including the webbing and all hardware periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re- place the seatbelts even if only minor damage is found.
Keep the belts free of polishes, oils, chemi- cals and particularly battery acid.
Never attempt to make modifications or changes that will prevent the seatbelt from op- erating properly.
Seatbelt extender If the front seatbelts are not long enough to permit the tongue plate to engage with the seatbelt buckle, an optional seatbelt extender is available from your SUBARU dealer. When ordering an extender, only or- der one particularly designed for your vehicle. Several different types of extenders are available to match var- ious varieties of front seatbelt designs. See your SUBARU dealer for assistance.
The extender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of length and it can be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position.
Be sure to observe the following when using the seatbelt extender. Failure to follow these instructions and warn- ings could reduce the effectiveness of the seat- belt and result in more serious injury in the event of a collision.
Never use the extender when the belt itself is long enough to permit it to be buckled properly. If removal of heavy clothing is all that is needed to permit the seatbelt to be buckled properly, remove the heavy clothing and do not use the
1-30
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
extender. Do not use the extender if the buckle of the
extender rests over the abdomen. Do not let someone else use the extender.
Use of an extender when it is not needed could reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt and re- sult in more serious injury in the event of a col- lision.
Use the extender only for the front seatbelts and only for the model for which it was original- ly provided. Never use the extender for the rear seatbelts or for a different model.
NOTE When the seatbelt extender is used by a pregnant passenger, consult a doctor to get approval in ad- vance.
To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the tongue plate into the seatbelt buckle so that the PRESS signs on the buckle-release buttons of the extender and the seatbelt are both facing outward as shown in the diagram. You will hear a click when the tongue plate locks into the buckle.
When releasing the seatbelt, press on the buckle-re- lease button on the extender, not on the seatbelt. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle interior and ex- tender itself.
For the safety of others, the extender should be re- moved after each use, especially if the next person us- ing the seatbelt does not need one.
US1110BA
1-31
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
Front seatbelt pretensioners
The drivers and front passengers seatbelts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be activated in the event of an accident in- volving a moderate to severe frontal collision. Also, the seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be activated in the event of an accident involving a mod- erate to severe side impact collision.
The pretensioner sensor also serves as the frontal and side SRS airbag sensors. If the sensors detect a cer- tain predetermined amount of force during a frontal collision or a side impact collision, the front seatbelt is
quickly drawn back in by the retractor to take up the slack so that the belt more effectively restrains the front seat occupant. When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, an operat- ing noise will be heard and a small amount of smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal and not harmful. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated, the seatbelt retractor remains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not be pulled out and retracted and therefore must be replaced.
NOTE Seatbelt pretensioners are not designed to acti-
vate in minor frontal impacts, in minor side im- pacts or in rear impacts or in roll-over accidents.
The drivers seat and passengers seat preten- sioners and frontal SRS airbag operate simulta- neously.
The drivers and passengers seatbelt preten- sioners and the SRS side airbag operate simulta- neously.
Pretensioners are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. In the event that a preten- sioner is activated, both the drivers and front pas- sengers seatbelt retractor assemblies must be re-
HS1067BA
1-32
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
placed only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When replacing seatbelt retractor assemblies, use only genuine SUBARU parts.
If either front seatbelt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the pretensioner, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
If the front seatbelt retractor assembly or sur- rounding area has been damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to ex- plain to the buyer that it has seatbelt pretension- ers by alerting him to the contents of this section.
To obtain maximum protection, the occu- pants should sit in an upright position with their seatbelts properly fastened. Refer to the Seatbelts section in this chapter.
Do not modify, remove or strike the front seatbelt retractor assemblies or surrounding area. This could result in accidental activation of the seatbelt pretensioners or could make the system inoperative, possibly resulting in seri- ous injury. Seatbelt pretensioners have no user-serviceable parts. For required servicing of front seatbelt retractors equipped with seat-
belt pretensioners, see your nearest SUBARU dealer.
When discarding front seatbelt retractor as- semblies or scrapping the entire vehicle due to collision damage or for other reasons, consult your SUBARU dealer.
System monitors
A diagnostic system continually monitors the readi- ness of the seatbelt pretensioner while the vehicle is being driven. The seatbelt pretensioners share the control module with the SRS airbag system. There-
US1115BA
1-33
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
fore, if any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt preten- sioner, the SRS airbag system warning light will illumi- nate. The SRS airbag system warning light will show normal system operation by lighting for about 6 sec- onds when the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- tion.
The following components are monitored by the indi- cator:
Front sub sensor (Right hand side) Front sub sensor (Left hand side) Side airbag sensor (Drivers side) Side airbag sensor (Passengers side) Airbag control module (including impact sensors) Seatbelt pretensioner (Drivers side) Seatbelt pretensioner (Passengers side) All related wiring And all other airbag components
If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag sys- tem. Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly re- paired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbags will operate improperly (e.g. SRS air- bags may inflate in a very minor collision or not inflate in a severe collision), which may in- crease the risk of injury.
Flashing or flickering of the indicator light No illumination of the warning light when the
ignition switch is first turned to the ON posi- tion
Continuous illumination of the warning light Illumination of the warning light while driving
System servicing
When discarding a seatbelt retractor assem- bly or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.
Tampering with or disconnecting the sys- tems wiring could result in accidental activa- tion of the seatbelt pretensioner and/or SRS air- bag or could make the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury. The wiring harnesses of the seatbelt pretensioner and SRS airbag systems are covered with yellow insula- tion and the connectors of the system are yel-
1-34
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
low for easy identification. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the seatbelt pretensioner and SRS airbag systems. For required servicing of the seatbelt preten- sioner, see your nearest SUBARU dealer.
The front sub sensors are located near the bot- tom of the radiator and the side airbag sensor is located inside each center pillar and the SRS airbag control module including the impact sensors is located under the center console. If you need service or repair in those areas or near the front seatbelt retractors, we recom- mend that you have an authorized SUBARU dealer perform the work.
NOTE If the front part of the vehicle is damaged in an ac- cident to the extent that the seatbelt pretensioner does not operate, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
Precautions against vehicle modifica- tion
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to in- stall any accessory parts to your vehicle.
Do not perform any of the following modifica- tions. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the seatbelt pretensioners.
Attachment of any equipment (bush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the front end.
Modification of the suspension system or front end structure.
Installation of a tire of different size and con- struction from the tires specified on the tire placard attached to the drivers door jamb.
1-35
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
Child restraint systems
Infants and small children should always be placed in an infant or child restraint system in the rear seat while riding in the vehicle. You should use an infant or child restraint system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is compatible with your vehicle and is ap- propriate for the childs age and size. All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt (except those covered under the section in this manu- al, entitled Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH)).
Children could be endangered in an accident if their child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle. When installing the child restraint system, carefully fol- low the manufacturers instructions.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces require that in- fants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint system at all times while the vehicle is moving.
US1114BA
HS1069BA
1-36
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap or in his or her arms while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision, because the child will be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle. Additionally, holding a child in your lap or arms in the front seat exposes that child to another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force, the child could be injured or even killed.
Children should be properly restrained at all times. Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on any seat. Unrestrained children will be thrown forward during sudden stop or in an ac- cident and can be injured seriously. Additionally, children standing up or kneeling on or in front of the front seat are exposed an- other serious danger. Since the SRS airbag de- ploys with considerable speed and force, the child could be injured or even killed.
HS1070BA
1-37
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
Where to place a child restraint system The following are SUBARUs recommendations on where to place a child restraint system in your vehicle.
A: Front passengers seat You should not install a child restraint system due to the hazard to children posed by the passengers air- bag.
B: Rear seat, window-side seating positions Recommended positions for all types of child restraint systems. In these positions, Automatic/Emergency Locking Re- tractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and lower anchorages (bars) are provided for installing a child restraint system.
C: Rear seat, center seating position Installing a child restraint system is not recommended, although the A/ELR seatbelt is provided in this posi- tion. Some types of child restraints might not be able to be secured firmly due to projection of the seat cushion. In this seating position, you should use only a child re- straint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt.
Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, be sure to secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward fac- ing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times. You should choose a restraint device which is appropriate for the childs age, height and
US1575AA
1-38
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
weight. According to accident statistics, chil- dren are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.
SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGERS SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGERS SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
Choosing a child restraint system
Choose a child restraint system that is appropriate for the childs age and size (weight and height) in order to provide the child with proper protection. The child re- straint system should meet all applicable requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for United States or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for Canada. It can be identified by locking for the label on the child restraint system or the manufactures state- ment of compliance in the document attached to the
HG1043BA
UGS507AA
1-39
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
system. Also it is important for you to make sure that the child restraint system is compatible with the vehi- cle in which it will be used.
Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR seatbelt
Child restraint systems and seatbelts can be- come hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it.
Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle. Unsecured child re- straint systems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; it can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child.
When you install a child restraint system, fol- low the manufacturers instructions supplied
with it. After installing the child restraint sys- tem, check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be increased.
Installing a rearward facing child restraint
1. Place the child restraint system in the rear seating position. 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you
UGS508BA
1-40
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
hear a click.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Lock- ing Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retrac- tor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as ALR.
6. Push and pull the child restraint system forward and from side to side to check if it is firmly secured. Sometime a child restraint can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then tightening the seatbelt. 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).
UGS509BA
UGS510BA
1-41
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
8. To remove the child restraint system, press the re- lease button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR mode.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGERS SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully.
Installing forward facing child restraint
1. Place the child restraint system in the rear seating position. 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
UG1089BA
US1581BA
1-42
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Lock- ing Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retrac- tor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as ALR.
6. Before having a child sit in the child restraint sys- tem, move it back and forth and right and left to check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then tightening the seatbelt. 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).
US1582BA US1583BA
1-43
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
8. If the child restraint system requires a top tether, latch the hook onto the top tether anchor and tighten the top tether. See the Top tether anchorages for ad- ditional instructions.
9. To remove the child restraint system, press the re- lease button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR mode. Unhook the top tether hook from the top tether anchor.
NOTE When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully.
US1594BA UG1094BA
1-44
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Installing a booster seat
Child restraint systems and seatbelts can be- come hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it.
Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle. Unsecured child re- straint systems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; it can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child.
When you install a child restraint system, fol- low the manufacturers instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint sys- tem, check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in
the event of an accident may be increased.
1. Place the booster seat in the rear seating position and sit the child on it. The child should sit well back on the booster seat. 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the booster seat and the child following the instruc- tions provided by its manufacturer. 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click. Take care not to twist the seatbelt. Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of childs shoulder and that the lap belt is posi- tioned as low as possible on the childs hips.
US1585BA
1-45
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
4. To remove the booster seat, press the release but- ton on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract.
Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this can increase the risk or sever- ity of injury to the child.
Never place the shoulder belt under the childs arm or behind the childs back. If an ac- cident occurs, this can increase the risk or se- verity of injury to the child.
The seatbelt should fit snugly in order to pro- vide full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as
effective in preventing or reducing injury. Place the lap belt as low as possible on the
childs hips. A high-positioned lap belt will in- crease the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of childs shoulder. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a colli- sion.
Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH)
Child restraint systems and seatbelts can be- come hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it.
Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle. Unsecured child re-
US1586BA
1-46
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
straint systems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; it can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child.
When you install a child restraint system, fol- low the manufacturers instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint sys- tem, check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be increased.
Some types of child restraint systems can be installed on the rear seat of your vehicle without use of the seat- belts. Such child restraint systems are secured to the designated anchorages provided on the vehicle body. The lower and tether anchorages are sometimes re- ferred to as the LATCH system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
Your vehicle is equipped with four lower anchorages (bars) and three upper anchorages (tether anchorag- es) for accommodating such child restraint systems.
US1112BA
1-47
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for installing a child restraint system only on the rear seat window- side seating positions. For each window-side seating position, two lower anchorages are provided. Each anchor bar is located where the seat cushion meets the seatback.
The tether anchorages (upper anchorages) are pro- vided for all the seating positions (middle and both window-side ones) of the rear seat.
HS1076BA HS1077BA
1-48
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
You will find marks at the bottom of the rear seat seatbacks. These marks indicate the positions of the lower anchorages (bars).
Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cush- ion meets the seatback.
1. Use the marks to locate the two lower an- chorages (bars) for the position where you want to in- stall the child restraint system.
HS1078BA HS1079BA
1-49
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
2. While following the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer, connect the lower hooks onto the lower anchorages located at marks on the bottom of the rear seatback. When the hooks are connected, make sure the adjacent seat- belts are not caught.
3. [If your child restraint system is of a flexible attach- ment type (which uses tether belts to connect the child restraint system properly to the lower anchorages)] While pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion, pull both left and right lower tether belts up to secure the child restraint system firmly by taking up the slack in the belt. 4. Connect the top tether hook to the tether anchor- age and firmly tighten the tether. For information on how to set the top tether, read the following Top tether anchorages.
US1588CA UG1098BA
1-50
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
5. Before seating a child in the child restraint system, try to move seat back and forth and left and right to verify that it is held securely in position. 6. To remove the child restraint system, follow the re- verse procedures of installation.
If you have any question concerning this type of child restraint system, ask your SUBARU dealer.
Top tether anchorages Your vehicle is equipped with three top tether anchor- ages so that a child restraint system having a top teth- er can be installed in the rear seat. When installing a child restraint system using top tether, proceed as fol-
lows, while observing the instructions by the child re- straint system manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional stability by of- fering another connection between a child restraint system and the vehicle, we recommend that you use a top tether whenever one is required or available.
US1113BA
1-51
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
Anchorage location
A) For left seat B) For center seat C) For right seat
Three upper anchorages are installed on the rear edge of the roof. Open the cover flaps to use the tether anchorages.
To hook the top tether
1. Remove the head restraint at the seating position where the child restraint system has been installed with the lower anchorages or seatbelt; lift up the head restraint while pressing the release button. Store the head restraint in the cargo area. Avoid placing the head restraint in the passenger compartment to pre- vent it from being thrown around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.
C
B
A
HS1080BC
HS1081BA
1-52
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
2. Open the cover flaps to use the anchorages. Fas- ten the top tether hook of the child restraint system to the appropriate top tether anchorage.
3. Tighten the top tether securely.
Always remove the head restraint when mount- ing a child restraint system with a top tether. Otherwise, it may not be possible to fasten the top tether tightly.
US1593BA US1594BA
1-53
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) *SRS: This stands for supplemental restraint system. This name is used because the airbag system supple- ments the vehicles seatbelts.
Vehicle with drivers and front passen- gers SRS airbags and lap/shoulder re- straints
Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system in addition to a lap/shoulder belt at each front seating position. The supplemental restraint system (SRS) consists of two airbag (drivers and front passengers frontal air- bags) or four airbags (drivers and front passengers frontal airbags and drivers and front passengers side airbags). These SRS airbags are designed only as a supple- ment to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt.
To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seatbelts when the vehicle is moving. The SRS airbag is designed only as a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt. It does not do away with the need to fasten seatbelts. In combina- tion with the seatbelts, it offers the best com- bined protection in case of a serious accident. Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag. For instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt system, see the Seatbelts sec- tions in this chapter.
Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS airbag. Because the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed faster than the blink of an eye and force to protect in high speed collisions, the force of an airbag can injure an occupant whose body is too close to SRS air- bag. It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can result when the SRS air- bag contacts an occupant not in proper posi- tion such as one thrown forward during pre-ac- cident braking. Even when properly positioned, there remains a possibility that an occupant may suffer minor
1-54
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
injury such as abrasions and bruises to the face or arms because of the SRS airbag deploy- ment force.
The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy- ment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full ve- hicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.
Do not place any objects over or near the SRS airbag cover or between you and the SRS airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle and cause injury.
Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, espe- cially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained. Be- cause children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deploy- ment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint devic-
HS1034BA
1-55
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
es) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seat- belt, whichever is appropriate for the childs age, height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (in- cluding forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat- ing positions than in the front seating posi- tions. For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint system, see the Child re- straint systems section in this chapter.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front passengers seat, or never hold a child on your lap or in your arms. The SRS airbag de- ploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.
When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke will be released. This smoke could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. If you or your passengers have breathing problems after SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air promptly.
A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Oc- cupants could get burnt if they come into direct contact with the hot gas.
NOTE When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that it is equipped with SRS airbags by alerting him to the applicable section in this owners manual.
1-56
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
4
3
1
7
9 12
5
2
10
6
8
11
US1116BB
1) Airbag control module (including impact sensors)
2) Airbag module (drivers side) 3) Airbag module (passengers
side) 4) Front sub sensor (right hand
side) 5) Front sub sensor (left hand side) 6) Side airbag module (drivers
side if equipped) 7) Side airbag module (passen-
gers side if equipped) 8) Side airbag sensor (drivers
side) 9) Side airbag sensor (passengers
side) 10) Airbag wiring 11) Seatbelt pretensioner (drivers
side) 12) Seatbelt pretensioner (passen-
gers side)
1-57
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
SRS frontal airbag The drivers SRS frontal airbag is stowed in the center portion of the steering wheel. The passengers SRS frontal airbag is stowed near the top of the dashboard under an SRS AIRBAG mark. In a moderate to severe frontal collision, the drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags deploy and supplement the seatbelts by reducing the impact on the drivers and front passengers head and chest.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front passengers seat. The SRS airbag de- ploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.
HG1043BA
HS1070BA
1-58
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.
The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy- ment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full ve- hicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat. It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help
HS1069BA HS1084BA
1-59
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
avoid injuries that can result when the SRS air- bag contacts an occupant not in proper posi- tion such as one thrown toward the front of the vehicle during pre-accident braking.
Do not put any objects over the steering wheel pad and dashboard. If the SRS frontal airbag deploys, those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle and cause injury.
Do not attach accessories to the windshield, or fit an extra-wide mirror over the rear view mir- ror. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects could become projectiles that could seriously injure vehicle occupants.
HS1085BA
HS1086BA
1-60
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Operation
A) Drivers side B) Passengers side 1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs. 2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the drivers vision is not obstructed.
A B
1
2
HS1087BB
1-61
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
The SRS airbag can function only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
If the sensors detect a certain predetermined amount of force during a frontal collision, the control module sends signals to the frontal airbag modules instructing them to inflate the SRS frontal airbags. Then both air- bag modules produce gas, which instantly inflates drivers and passengers SRS frontal airbags. After the deployment, the SRS airbags immediately start to de- flate so that the drivers vision is not obstructed. The time required from detecting impact to the deflation of the SRS airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye.
The front passengers SRS frontal airbag deploys to- gether with drivers SRS frontal airbag even when no one occupies the front passengers seat.
Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS airbag would activate in a non-accident situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag will deflate quickly, not obscuring vi- sion and will not interfere with the drivers ability to maintain control of the vehicle.
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the
vehicle.
Do not touch the SRS airbag system compo- nents around the steering wheel and dash- board with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the compo- nents can be very hot as a result of deployment.
The SRS frontal airbag is designed to deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe frontal collision. It is basically not designed to deploy in lesser frontal impacts because the necessary pro- tection can be achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, it is basically not designed to deploy in side or rear im- pacts or in roll-over accidents because deployment of the SRS frontal airbag would not help the occupant in those situations. The SRS airbag is designed to func- tion on a one-time-only basis.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in the passenger compartment during a collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
1-62
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
When will the SRS frontal airbag most likely de- ploy?
A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) or high- er activates the SRS frontal airbag. The SRS frontal airbag will also be activated when the vehicle is ex- posed to a frontal impact similar in fashion and magni- tude to the above-mentioned collision.
At what other times might the SRS frontal air- bag deploy?
The SRS frontal airbag may be activated when the ve- hicle sustains a hard impact in the undercarriage area from the road surface (such as when the vehicle
HS1088BA
US1556BA
1-63
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
plunges into a deep ditch, is severely bumped or knocked hard against an obstacle on the road such as a curb).
When is the SRS frontal airbag unlikely to de- ploy?
There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS frontal airbag deployment. If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a telephone pole or sign pole, or if it slides under a trucks load bed, or if it sustains an oblique offset frontal impact, the SRS frontal airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.
US1557BA
1-64
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
When will the SRS frontal airbag not deploy?
The SRS frontal airbag is basically not designed to de- ploy if the vehicle is struck from side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its side or roof, or if it is involved in a low- speed frontal collision.
A) First impact B) Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is impacted more than once, the SRS frontal airbag deploys only once.
Example: In the case of a double collision, first with an- other vehicle, then against a concrete wall in immedi- ate succession, once the SRS frontal airbag is activat- ed on the first impact, it will not be activated on the second.
US1558BA
B
A
HS1104BC
1-65
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
SRS side airbag (if equipped) The SRS side airbag is stored in the door side of each front seatback, which bears an SRS AIRBAG label. In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS side airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle de- ploys between the occupant and the door panel and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupants chest and head.
The SRS side airbag is designed as only a sup- plement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt. It does not do away with the need to fasten seatbelts. It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can re- sult when an occupant is not seated in a proper upright position.
Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to either front door. The SRS side airbag is stored in both front seat seatbacks next to the door, and it provides protection by deploying rapidly (faster than the blink of an eye) in the event of a side impact collision. However, the force of SRS side airbag deployment may cause injuries if your head or other body parts are too close to the SRS side airbag.
HS1092BA
1-66
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Do not rest your arm on either front door or its internal trim. It could be injured in the event of SRS side airbag deployment.
HS1093BA HS1094BA
HS1095BA
1-67
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
Never allow a child to kneel on the front pas- sengers seat facing the side window or to wrap his/her arms around the front seatback. In the event of an accident, the force of the SRS side airbag deployment could injure the child seri- ously because his/her head or arms or other body parts are too close to the SRS side airbag. Since your vehicle is also equipped with a pas- sengers SRS frontal airbag, children aged 12 and under should be placed in the rear seat anyway and should be properly restrained at all times.
Do not attach accessories to the door trim or near either SRS side airbags and do not place objects near the SRS side airbags. In the event of the SRS side airbag deployment, they could be propelled dangerously toward the vehicles occupants and cause injuries.
HS1096BA
1-68
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Do not put any kind of cover or clothes or other objects over either front seatback and do not attach labels or stickers to the front seat sur- face on or near the SRS side airbag. They could prevent proper deployment of the SRS side air- bag, reducing protection available to the front seats occupant.
Operation
A) SRS side airbag deploys as soon as a collision oc- curs.
B) SRS side airbag protects the front passengers head
HS1097BA
A
B
C
HS1098BB
1-69
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
and chest. C) After deployment, SRS side airbag starts to deflate im-
mediately.
The SRS side airbag can function only when the igni- tion switch is in the ON position.
The drivers and front passengers SRS side airbags deploy independently of each other since each has its own impact sensor. Also, the SRS side airbag deploys independently of the frontal airbags in the steering wheel and instrument panel.
An impact sensor is incorporated into each of the ve- hicles center pillars. If either sensor detects a certain predetermined amount of force during a side impact collision, the control module sends a signal to the side airbag module on the impacted side of the vehicle, in- structing it to inflate the SRS side airbag. Then the side airbag module produces gas, which instantly in- flates the SRS side airbag. After deployment, the SRS side airbag will deflate in a few seconds.
The SRS side airbag deploys even when no one occu- pies the seat on the side on which an impact is ap- plied.
When the SRS side airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal result of
the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
Do not touch the SRS side airbag system com- ponents around the front seatback with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.
The SRS side airbag is designed to deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe side im- pact collision. It is basically not designed to deploy in lesser side impact. Also, it is basically not designed to deploy in frontal or rear impacts because SRS side air- bag deployment would not help the occupant in those situations. Each SRS side airbag is designed to function on a one-time-only basis.
SRS side airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in the passenger compartment dur- ing a side impact collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
1-70
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
When will the SRS side airbag most likely de- ploy?
A severe side impact near the front seat activates the SRS side airbag.
HS1099BA
1-71
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
When is the SRS side airbag unlikely to deploy?
A
C
B
D
E
US1568BC
A) The vehicle is involved in an ob- lique side-on impact.
B) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact in an area outside the vicin- ity of the passenger compartment.
C) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or similar object.
D) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact from a motorcycle.
E) The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.
1-72
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS side airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.
When will the SRS side airbag not deploy?
A) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision with another vehicle (moving or stationary).
B) The vehicle is struck from behind.
A
B
US1569BC
1-73
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
The SRS side airbag is basically not designed to de- ploy if the vehicle is involved in a frontal collision or is struck from behind. Examples of such accidents are il- lustrated.
A) First impact B) Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is struck from the side more than once, the SRS side airbag deploys only once.
Example: In the case of a double side impact collision, first with one vehicle and immediately followed by an- other from the same direction, once the SRS side air- bag is activated on the first impact, it will not be acti-
vated on the second.
SRS airbag system monitors
A diagnostic system continually monitors the readi- ness of the SRS airbag system while the vehicle is be- ing driven. The SRS airbag system warning light AIR- BAG will show normal system operation by lighting for about 6 seconds when the ignition key is turned to the ON position.
The following components are monitored by the indi- cator:
Front sub sensor (Right hand side) Front sub sensor (Left hand side)
B
A
HS1102BC US1115BA
1-74
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Airbag control module (including impact sensors) Frontal airbag module (Drivers side) Frontal airbag module (Passengers side) Side airbag sensor (Drivers side) Side airbag sensor (Passengers side) Side airbag module (Drivers side) Side airbag module (Passengers side) Seatbelt pretensioner (Drivers side) Seatbelt pretensioner (Passengers side) All related wiring
If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag sys- tem. Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly re- paired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbags will operate improperly (e.g. SRS air- bags may inflate in a very minor collision or not inflate in a severe collision), which may in- crease the risk of injury.
Flashing or flickering of the indicator light No illumination of the warning light when the
ignition switch is first turned to the ON posi- tion
Continuous illumination of the warning light Illumination of the warning light while driving
1-75
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
SRS airbag system servicing
When discarding an airbag module or scrap- ping the entire vehicle damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.
The SRS airbag has no user-serviceable parts. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS airbag system. For required servicing of the SRS airbag, see your nearest SUBARU dealer. Tampering with or disconnecting the systems wiring could re- sult in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag or could make the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury. The wiring harnesses of the SRS airbag system are covered with yellow insulation and system connectors are yellow for easy identification.
If you need service or repair in areas listed be- low, we recommend that you have an autho- rized SUBARU dealer perform the work. The SRS airbag control module, impact sensors and airbag modules are stored in these areas.
Under the center console Near the bottom of the radiator Steering wheel and column and nearby areas Top of the dashboard on front passengers
side and nearby areas Each front seat and nearby area (for vehicles
with SRS side airbags only) Inside each center pillar
In the event that the SRS airbag is deployed, re- placement of the system should be performed only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When the components of the SRS airbag system are re- placed, use only genuine SUBARU parts.
To ensure their long-term reliability, the SRS airbags must be inspected by a SUBARU dealer ten years af- ter the date of manufacture, which is shown on the cer- tification plate attached to the drivers door jamb.
NOTE In the following cases, contact your SUBARU deal- er as soon as possible.
The front part of the vehicle was involved in an accident in which the SRS frontal airbags did not deploy.
The pad section of the steering wheel or front
1-76
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
passengers frontal airbag cover is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
In addition, if your vehicle is equipped with SRS side airbags, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible in the following cases.
Either center pillar or a nearby area of the vehi- cle was involved in an accident in which the SRS side airbag did not deploy.
The fabric or leather of either front seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise damaged.
Precautions against vehicle modifica- tion
To avoid accidental activation of the system or rendering the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury, no modifications should be made to any components or wiring of the SRS airbag system. This includes following modifications:
Installation of custom steering wheels Attachment of additional trim materials to
the dashboard Installation of custom seats (for vehicles
with SRS side airbags only) Replacement of seat fabric or leather (for
vehicles with SRS side airbags only) Installation of additional fabric or leather
on the front seat (for vehicles with SRS side airbags only) Installation of additional electrical/electronic
equipment such as a mobile two-way radio on or near the SRS airbag system components and/or wiring is not advisable. This could inter- fere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system.
Do not perform any of the following modifica- tions. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system.
Attachment of any equipment (brush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the front end.
Modification of the suspension system or front end structure.
Installation of a tire of different size and con- struction from the tires specified on the tire
1-77
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CONTINUED
placard attached to the drivers door jamb. Attachment of any equipment (side steps or
side sill protectors, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the side body. (for vehicles with side airbags only)
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to in- stall any accessory parts to your vehicle.
2-1
2
Keys and doors
Keys ............................................................... 2-2 Key number ....................................................... 2-3
Immobilizer (if equipped) ............................. 2-3 Security ID plate ................................................ 2-4 Security indicator light ..................................... 2-5 Key replacement ............................................... 2-5
Door locks ..................................................... 2-6 Locking and unlocking from the outside ........ 2-6 Locking and unlocking from the inside .......... 2-7
Power door locking switches ...................... 2-8 Remote keyless entry system
(if equipped) .............................................. 2-9 Locking the doors ............................................. 2-10 Unlocking the doors ......................................... 2-10 Illuminated entry ............................................... 2-11 Vehicle finder function ..................................... 2-11 Sounding a panic alarm ................................... 2-11 Selecting audible signal operation .................. 2-11 Replacing the battery ....................................... 2-11 Replacing lost transmitters .............................. 2-13
Security system (if equipped) ..................... 2-17 System operation .............................................. 2-17 Arming the system ............................................ 2-17 Disarming the system ....................................... 2-19 Valet mode ......................................................... 2-20 Passive arming .................................................. 2-20
Child safety locks ......................................... 2-23 Windows ........................................................ 2-24
Power windows ................................................. 2-24 Rear gate ....................................................... 2-27
Moonroof (if equipped) ................................. 2-28 To open the moonroof ...................................... 2-28 To close the moonroof ..................................... 2-29 Anti-entrapment function ................................. 2-29
2-2
Keys and doors
Keys and doorsKeys
Vehicle with immobilizer system A) Master key (Black) B) Submaster key (Black) C) Valet key (Gray) D) Key number plate E) Security ID plate
Vehicle without immobilizer system A) Master key B) Submaster key C) Valet key D) Key number plate
Three types of keys are provided for your vehicle: Master key, submaster key and valet key.
The master key and submaster key fit all locks on your vehicle.
Ignition switch Drivers door Glove box
A B C
D E
UG2044BD
A B C
D
HS2011BC
2-3
Keys and doors
CONTINUED
The valet key fits only the ignition switch and door lock. You can keep the glove box locked when you leave your vehicle and valet key at a parking facility.
Do not attach a large key holder or key case to either key. If it banged against your knees while you were driving, it could turn the ignition switch from the ON position to the ACC or OFF position, thereby stopping the engine.
Key number The key number is stamped on the key number plate attached to the key set. Write down the key number and keep it in another safe place, not in the vehicle. This number is needed to make a replacement key if you lose your key or lock it inside the vehicle.
For information on making replacement keys for vehi- cles with the simmobilizer system, refer to the Immo- bilizer (if equipped) in this chapter.
Immobilizer (if equipped) The immobilizer system is designed to prevent unau- thorized persons from starting the engine. Only keys registered with your vehicles immobilizer system can be used to operate your vehicle. Even if an unregis- tered key fits into the ignition switch and can be turned to the START position, the engine will automatically stop after several seconds.
Each immobilizer key contains a transponder in which the keys ID code is stored. When a key is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to the ON position, the transponder transmits the keys ID code to the immo- bilizer systems receiver. If the transmitted ID code matches the ID code registered in the immobilizer sys- tem, the system allows the engine to be started. Since the ID code is transmitted and acted upon almost in- stantly, the immobilizer system does not impede nor- mal starting of the engine. If the engine fails to start, pull out the key once before trying again. (Refer to the Ignition switch section [chapter 3].)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Oper- ation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
2-4
Keys and doors
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE To protect your vehicle from theft, please pay close attention to the following security precau- tions:
Never leave your vehicle unattended with its keys inside.
Before leaving your vehicle, close all windows and lock the doors and rear gate.
Do not leave spare keys or any record of your key number in the vehicle.
Do not place the key under direct sunlight or anywhere it may become hot.
Do not get the key wet. If the key gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth immediately.
Security ID plate
A) Key number plate B) Security ID plate
The security ID is stamped on the security ID plate at- tached to the key set. Write down the security ID and keep it in another safe place, not in the vehicle. This number is needed to make a replacement key if you lose your key or lock it inside the vehicle. This number is also needed for replacement or repair of the engine control module and immobilizer control module.
A B
UB2534BB
2-5
Keys and doors
CONTINUED
Security indicator light The security indicator light deters potential thieves by indicating that the vehicle is equipped with an immobi- lizer system. It begins flashing about 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the ON position to the ACC or LOCK position or immediately after the key is pulled out. If the security indicator light does not flash, the immo- bilizer system may be faulty. If this occurs, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g. an imitation key), the security indicator light comes on.
NOTE Even if the security indicator light flashes irregu- larly or its fuse blows (the light does not flash if its fuse is blown), the immobilizer system will func- tion normally.
Key replacement Your key number plate and security ID plate will be re- quired if you ever need a replacement key made. Any new key must be registered for use with your vehicles immobilizer system before it can be used. Up to four keys can be registered for use with one vehicle. For security, all the keys registered with your vehicles
immobilizer system will have their ID codes erased and re-registered when a new key is made. Therefore, all of your vehicles keys must be presented when a new key is registered. Any key that is not re-registered when a new key is made cannot be used after the oth- er keys are re-registered. For information on replace- ment keys and on the registration of keys with your im- mobilizer system, contact your SUBARU dealer.
2-6
Keys and doors
Door locks
Locking and unlocking from the out- side
A) Lock B) Unlock
To lock the door from the outside with the key, turn the key toward the rear. To unlock the door, turn the key toward the front (Drivers side only).
Pull the outside door handle to open the unlocked door.
A) Rotate the lock lever rearward. B) Close the door.
To lock the door from the outside without the key, ro- tate the lock lever rearward and then close the door.
To lock the door from the outside using the power door locking switch, push the front side of the switch (LOCK side) and then close the door. In this case, all closed doors and the rear gate are locked at the same time.
Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate are locked before leaving your vehicle.
A
B
HS2012BC
A
B HS2013BC
2-7
Keys and doors
CONTINUED
NOTE Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle when locking the doors from the outside without the key.
Locking and unlocking from the inside
A) Lock B) Unlock
To lock the door from the inside, rotate the lock lever rearward. To unlock the door from the inside, rotate the lock lever forward.
The red mark on the lock lever appears when the door
is unlocked.
Pull the inside door handle to open an unlocked door.
Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate are closed before starting to drive.
Keep all doors locked when you drive, especial- ly when small children are in your vehicle. Along with the proper use of seatbelts and child restraints, locking the doors reduces the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in an accident. It also helps prevent passengers from falling out if a door is accidentally opened, and intrud- ers from unexpectedly opening doors and en- tering your vehicle.
HS2014BC
A B
2-8
Keys and doors
Power door locking switches
A) Lock B) Unlock
All doors and the rear gate can be locked and un- locked by the power door locking switches located at the drivers side and the front passengers side doors.
To lock the doors, push the front side of the switch. To unlock the doors, push the rear side of the switch.
When you close the doors after you set the door locks, the doors remain locked.
NOTE Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle before locking the doors from the outside using power door locking switches.
A
B
HS2015BC
2-9
Keys and doors
CONTINUED
Remote keyless entry system (if equipped) Two transmitters are provided for your vehicle.
The remote keyless entry system has the following functions.
Locking and unlocking the doors and rear gate with- out a key
Sounding a panic alarm Arming and disarming the security system (if your
vehicle is equipped with an optional security system). See the next section Security system (if equipped) for detailed information.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Oper- ation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. The operable distance of the keyless entry system is approximately 30 feet (10 meters). However, this dis-
tance will vary depending on environmental condi- tions. The systems operable distance will be shorter in areas near a facility or electronic equipment emitting strong radio waves such as a power plant, broadcast station, TV tower, or remote controller of home elec- tronic appliances.
The keyless entry system does not operate when the key is inserted in the ignition switch to prevent acci- dental lockout.
Do not expose the transmitter to severe shocks, such as those experienced as a result of dropping or throwing.
Do not take the transmitter apart except when replacing the battery.
Do not get the transmitter wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth immediately.
2-10
Keys and doors
: LOCK/ARM button Press to Lock all doors. Press and Hold to activate panic alarm. Press three times in a five-second period to use vehicle finder function.
: UNLOCK/DISARM button 1) Press once to Unlock drivers door. 2) Press a second time to Unlock all other doors
and rear gate.
Locking the doors Briefly press the button (for less than two sec- onds) to lock all doors and rear gate. An electronic chirp will sound once and the turn signal lights will
flash once. If any of the doors or the rear gate is not fully closed, an electronic chirp will sound five times and the turn signal lights will flash five times to alert you that the doors or the rear gate are not properly closed. When you close the door, it will automatically lock.
NOTE If the button is pressed for two seconds or longer, the panic alarm will sound. When locking the doors in normal circumstances, press the button for less than two seconds. For de- tails on the panic alarm, refer to Sounding a panic alarm.
Unlocking the doors Briefly press the button (for less than two sec- onds) to unlock the drivers door. An electronic chirp will sound twice and the turn signal lights will flash twice. To unlock all other doors and rear gate, briefly press the button a second time within 5 sec- onds.
NOTE If the interval between the first and second press- es of the " " button (for unlocking of all of the doors and the rear gate) is extremely short, the
UG2042BA
2-11
Keys and doors
CONTINUED
system may not respond.
Illuminated entry The interior dome light and ignition switch light will illu- minate when the button is pressed. These lights stay illuminated for approximately 30 seconds if any of the doors or the rear gate is not opened. If the button is pressed before 30 seconds have elapsed, these lights will go out. Also, these lights will go out if the key is inserted in the ignition switch. The interior light switch must be set to the middle position in order for this function to operate.
Vehicle finder function Use this function to find your vehicle parked among many vehicles in a large parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the button three times in a five-second period will cause your vehicles horn to sound once and its turn signal lights to flash three times.
Sounding a panic alarm To activate the alarm, keep the button pressed for more than two seconds. The horn will sound and the turn signal lights will flash. To deactivate it, press the button or but-
ton. Unless a button on the remote is pressed, the alarm will be deactivated after approximately 30 sec- onds.
Selecting audible signal operation Using an electronic chirp, the system will give you an audible signal when the doors lock and unlock. If de- sired, you may turn the audible signal off. To turn the audible signal off, unlock the door by pressing the button and then simultaneously depress and buttons for more than two seconds. An electronic chirp will sound twice and the turn signal lights will flash twice to inform you that the audible signal has been turned off. To turn the audible signal on, unlock the door by pressing the button and then simultaneously depress and buttons for more than two seconds. An electronic chirp will sound once and the turn signal lights will flash once to inform you that the audible signal has been turned on.
Replacing the battery When the transmitter battery begins to get weak, transmitter range will begin to decrease. Replace the battery as soon as possible.
2-12
Keys and doors
To replace the battery: 0
1. Open the transmitter case using a flat-head screw- driver.
2. Separate the case. 3. Remove the old battery from the holder.
UG2043BA
UB2209BA
2-13
Keys and doors
CONTINUED
A) Negative () side facing up
4. Replace with a new battery (Type CR2025 or equivalent) making sure to install the new battery with the negative () side facing up. 5. Reinstall the back half of the transmitter case by snapping it back on.
After the battery is replaced, the transmitter must be synchronized with the keyless entry systems control unit. Press either the or but- ton six times to synchronize the unit.
Do not let dust, oil or water get on or in the transmitter when replacing the battery.
Be careful not to damage the printed circuit board in the transmitter when replacing the bat- tery.
Replacing lost transmitters If you lose a transmitter or want to purchase additional transmitters (up to four can be programmed), you should re-program all of your transmitters for security reasons. It is recommended that you have your dealer program all of your transmitters into your system.
Programming the transmitters The keyless entry system is equipped with a special code learning feature that allows you to program new transmitter codes into the system or to delete old ones. The system can learn up to four unique transmit- ter codes. The four transmitter codes may be the same or different.
A
UB2210BB
2-14
Keys and doors
To enter the programming mode: 0
1. Press button to disarm the security system. (If your vehicle is equipped with the optional security system.)
2. Open the drivers door and sit in the drivers seat. 3. Close the drivers door.
UG2042CA
HS2019BA
2-15
Keys and doors
CONTINUED
A) ON B) LOCK
4. Place the ignition key into the ignition switch and cycle the switch from LOCK to ON ten times within 15 seconds. Be sure to stop at the LOCK position. The horn will sound once to indicate that you are in the transmitter programming mode.
NOTE You must finish the next step (opening the drivers door) within 45 seconds of starting this proce- dures.
To program the transmitters: 0
1. Open the drivers door. 2. Close the drivers door.
AB
HS2020BD
HS2019BA
2-16
Keys and doors
3. Press and release any button on the transmitter that you wish to program into the system. The horn will sound twice to indicate that the transmitter has been programmed.
Any additional transmitters can also be programmed at this time. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for an additional transmitter.
To exit the programming mode: 1. After all of your transmitters are programmed, re- move the key from the ignition switch. The horn will sound three times to indicate that the system has exited the programming mode. 2. Make sure that the keyless entry system properly
operates by operating each transmitter.
Deleting old transmitter codes The control unit of the keyless entry system has four memory locations to store transmitter codes, giving it the ability to operate with up to four transmitters. When you lose a transmitter, the lost transmitters code re- mains in the memory. For security reasons, lost trans- mitter codes should be deleted from the memory. To delete old transmitter codes, program four trans- mitter codes into the system. If you have only one cur- rent transmitter, program it four times. If you have two current transmitters, program each one twice. If you have three current transmitters, program two of them once and the third one twice. This process will leave only current transmitter codes in the systems memo- ry.
NOTE Make sure no one else is operating their keyless entry system within range of your vehicle when programming transmitters. If someone else were to operate their remote transmitter while you are programming your transmitters, it is possible that their transmitter code will be programmed into your system, allowing them unauthorized access to your vehicle.
UG2042BA
2-17
Keys and doors
CONTINUED
Security system (if equipped) The security system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn sounds and the turn signal lights flash if someone attempts to break into your vehicle. The starter motor is also interrupted to prevent starting the vehicle without a key.
The system can be armed and disarmed with the re- mote transmitter. The system does not operate when the key is inserted into the ignition switch.
System operation The security system will give the following alarm indi- cations when triggered:
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will sound intermittently. In addition, the starter motor will not operate.
The alarm automatically resets after 30 seconds; however, the alarm will reactivate if the vehicle is tam- pered with again. The alarm will continue for six times if any sensor continues to be activated.
The alarm is triggered by: Opening a door or the rear gate. Application of physical shock to the vehicle (e.g.
forced entry). Note that there are two alarm levels for shock: warning and alarm. In warning mode, the alarm detects lower level vibrations and triggers 2 warning chirps on the horn and two flashes on the lights as a deterrent to would be vandals. In alarm mode, higher levels of shock are detected and the system will go into full alarm.
Ignition switch being turned on while in armed state.
NOTE With the valet mode selected, the security system does not operate when the remote transmitter is used for locking and unlocking. The security indi- cator light in the combination meter flashes twice per second to show that the valet mode is select- ed. For details, refer to Valet mode in this sec- tion.
Arming the system To arm the system using remote transmitter
1. Close all windows. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle. 4. Make sure that the engine hood is locked. 5. Close all doors and the rear gate.
2-18
Keys and doors
1) Press to Arm the system. 2) Press to Disarm the system.
Security indicator light
6. Briefly press the button (for less than two sec- onds). All doors and the rear gate will lock, an elec- tronic chirp will sound once, the turn signal lights will flash once, and the security indicator light will flash as follows: Models without immobilizer: once every approximately two seconds Models with immobilizer: twice every approximately two seconds
If any of the doors or the rear gate is not fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds five times, the turn signal lights flash five times to alert you that the doors or the
UG2042BB
2
1
HS2021BA
2-19
Keys and doors
CONTINUED
rear gate are not properly closed. When you close the door, the system will automatically arm and doors will automatically lock.
To arm the system using power door locking switches
1. Close all windows. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle. 4. Make sure that the engine hood is locked. 5. Close the doors and the rear gate but leave only the drivers door or the front passengers door open.
6. Push the front side (LOCK side) of the power door locking switch to set the door locks.
7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will sound once, the turn signal lights will flash once, and the security indicator light will flash as follows: Models without immobilizer: once every approximately two seconds Models with immobilizer: twice every approximately two seconds
NOTE The system can be armed even if the engine hood, the windows and/or moonroofs are opened. Al- ways make sure that they are fully closed before arming the system.
Disarming the system Briefly press the button (for less than two sec- onds) on the remote transmitter. The drivers door will unlock, an electronic chirp will sound twice, the turn signal lights will flash twice and the indicator light will go off.
NOTE (Models with immobilizer) If your vehicle is equipped with an immobilizer, the immobilizers function will cause the security indi- cator light to flash (once every approximately three seconds) even after the system is disarmed. To unlock all other doors and the rear gate, briefly
HS2013CA
2-20
Keys and doors
press the button a second time.
Emergency disarming If you cannot disarm the system using the transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost, broken or the transmitter battery is too weak), you can disarm the system with- out using the transmitter.
To disarm the system: 1. Unlock the door with the key and then open the door. 2. The alarm will sound. 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch and cycle it from the LOCK to the ON position three (3) times within 5 seconds.
Valet mode When you choose the valet mode, the security system does not operate. In valet mode, the remote transmit- ter is used only for locking and unlocking the doors and rear gate and panic activation.
To enter the valet mode, open the drivers door and keep the button depressed for more than two seconds. The security system status indicator light will continue to flash twice per second indicating that the system is in the valet mode.
To exit valet mode, open the drivers door and keep the button pressed for more than two sec- onds. The indicator will stop flashing.
NOTE If the remote transmitter is used to lock or unlock the doors while the valet mode is selected, the turn signal lights do not flash but an electronic chirp is emitted.
Passive arming When passive arming mode has been programmed by the dealer, arming of the system is automatically ac- complished without using the remote transmitter. Note that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE MANUALLY LOCKED.
To enter the passive mode Since programming the passive arming mode is a complicated procedure, have it done by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
Arming the system 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2-21
Keys and doors
CONTINUED
A) ON B) LOCK
2. Turn the ignition switch from ON to LOCK posi- tion and remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle. 4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors with the in- side door lock levers. 5. Close the doors. The system will automatically arm after one minute.
In the passive mode, the system can also be armed with the remote transmitter or with the power door locking switches. If the remote transmitter or power door locking switch is used to lock the vehicle, arming will take place immediately regardless of whether or not the passive mode has been selected.
A B
HS2024BD HS2013FA
2-22
Keys and doors
In passive mode, the system will automatically activate the alarm but WILL NOT automatically lock the doors. In order to lock the doors you must either lock them as indicated in step 4 above or with the key once they have been closed. Failure to lock the doors manually will result in a higher security risk.
Disarming the system To disarm the system, briefly press the button on the transmitter.
Tripped sensor identification (models without immobilizer)
If an electronic chirp sounds four times and the turn signal lights flash four times when you disarm the sys- tem, this indicates that the alarm was triggered. The number of times the indicator light flashes indicates what sensor caused the alarm condition.
To enter identification mode: 1. Open the drivers door and leave it open. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position twice. (LOCK ON LOCK ON LOCK) 3. The indicator light will start flashing.
The indicator light provides the following indications. Flashing once: Any door or the rear gate has been opened. Flashing three times: The impact sensor in the sys- tems unit has been activated. This may indicate that your vehicle has been shocked or tampered with by some outside force and/or unauthorized person. Flashing four times: The ignition switch has been turned on or the battery has been disconnected.
NOTE The battery must be reconnected before the indi- cator light will flash.
To exit this mode, close the door and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2-23
Keys and doors
CONTINUED
Child safety locks
A) Lock B) Unlock
Each rear door has a child safety lock that prevents the doors from being opened even if the inside door handle is pulled. When the child safety lock lever is in the lock position, the door cannot be opened from inside regardless of the position of the inner door handle lock lever. The door can only be opened from the outside.
Always use the child safety lock whenever a child rides in the rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opened the door and fell out.
B A
US2528BC
2-24
Keys and doors
Windows
Power windows
To avoid serious personal injury caused by en- trapment, you must do the following.
When operating the power windows, be ex- tremely careful to prevent anyones fingers, arms, neck or head from being caught in the window.
Always lock the passengers windows using the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle.
Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power window.
The power windows operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Drivers side switches
A) Lock switch B) For drivers window (with one-touch auto down fea-
ture) C) For front passengers window D) For rear left window E) For rear right window
All door windows can be controlled by the power win- dow switch cluster at the driver side door.
AB
D
E
C
HS2026BC
2-25
Keys and doors
CONTINUED
Operating the drivers window
A) Open B) Automatically open C) Close
To open: Push the switch down lightly and hold it. The window will open as long as the switch is held. This switch also has a one-touch auto down feature that allows the window to be opened fully without hold- ing the switch. Push the switch down until it clicks and release it, and the window will fully open. To stop the window half- way, pull the switch up lightly.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The window will close as long as the switch is held.
Operating the passengers windows
To open the passengers windows, push the appropri- ate switch down and hold it until the window reaches the desired position. To close the window, pull the switch up and hold it until it reaches the desired position.
C
A
B HS2027BC
HS2027CA
2-26
Keys and doors
Locking the passengers windows
A) Lock B) Unlock
To lock the passengers windows, push the lock switch. When the lock switch is in the LOCK position, the passengers windows cannot be opened or closed.
Passengers side switches To open the window, push the switch down and hold it until the window reaches the desired position. To close the window, pull the switch up and hold it until the window reaches the desired position.
When the lock switch on the power window switch
cluster, located on the drivers side door, is in the LOCK position, the passengers windows cannot be operated with the passengers switches.
A
B
US2033BB
2-27
Keys and doors
CONTINUED
Rear gate The rear gate can be locked and unlocked using either the keyless entry system or the power door locking switches. Refer to the Power door locking switches and Re- mote keyless entry system (if equipped) sections in this chapter.
To open the rear gate, first unlock the rear gate lock then pull the outside handle up. Then, hold the rear gate and raise it as high as it will go.
To close the rear gate, lower it slowly and push down firmly until the latch engages. The rear gate can be lowered easily if you pull down holding the recessed grip.
Do not attempt to shut the rear gate while holding the inside handle. Also avoid closing the rear gate by pulling on the inside handle from inside the cargo space. There is a danger of your hand being caught and injured.
To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from en- tering the vehicle, always keep the rear gate
HSB087CA
HS2029BA
2-28
Keys and doors
closed while driving.
Do not jam a plastic bag in or place cellophane tape on the rear gate stays or scratch the stays while loading or unloading cargo. That could cause leakage of gas from the stays, which may result in their inability to hold the rear gate open.
NOTE If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due to a dis- charged battery, a fault in the door locking/unlock- ing system or other causes, you can unlock it by manually operating the rear gate lock release le- ver. For the procedure, refer to Rear gate if the rear gate cannot be unlocked in chapter 9 In case of emergency .
Moonroof (if equipped)
A) Open/close switch B) Open C) Close
The moonroof operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
To open the moonroof Push and quickly release the rear part of the switch to open the moonroof. The sun shade also will be opened together with the moonroof. The moonroof will stop at a position 20 in (50 cm) away from the fully
A
B
C
HS2030BC
2-29
Keys and doors
CONTINUED
closed position. Push the switch again to open the moonroof completely. To stop the moonroof at a desired position, simply push the opposite side of the switch.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains, wipe away water on the roof prior to opening the moonroof to pre- vent water drops from falling into the passenger com- partment.
To close the moonroof Push and quickly release the front part of the switch to close the moonroof. The moonroof will stop at a posi- tion 8 in (20 cm) away from the fully closed position. Push the switch again to close the moonroof com- pletely. To stop the moonroof at a desired position, simply push the opposite side of the switch.
Anti-entrapment function When the moonroof senses an object trapped be- tween its glass and the vehicles roof during closure, it automatically moves back by 6 in (15 cm) from that point and then stops. The anti-entrapment function may also be activated by a strong shock on the moon- roof even when there is nothing trapped.
NOTE For the sake of safety, it is recommended that
you avoid driving with the moonroof fully opened. Driving with the moonroof fully open can cause
an annoying sound to generate at high speeds. If such a condition has been encountered, use the moonroof at the initial stop position of 20 in (50 cm).
If the moonroof cannot be closed through switch operation because of system failure, it can be closed manually using a hex-head wrench. For the procedure, refer to Moonroof if the moon- roof cannot be closed in Chapter 9 In case of emergency.
2-30
Keys and doors
Sun shade
The sun shade can be slid forward or backward by hand while the moonroof is closed. If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade also moves back.
Never let anyones hands, arms, head or any objects protrude from the moonroof. A person could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly or turns sharply or if the vehicle is in- volved in an accident.
To avoid serious personal injury caused by en- trapment, you must do the following.
Before closing the moonroof, make sure that no ones hands, arms, head or other objects will be accidentally caught in the moonroof.
Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the moonroof.
Never try to check the anti-entrapment func- tion by deliberately placing part of your body in the moonroof.
Do not sit on the edge of the open moonroof. Do not operate the moonroof if falling snow
or extremely cold conditions have caused it to freeze shut.
HS2031BA
3-1
3
Instruments and controls
Ignition switch .............................................. 3-3 LOCK .................................................................. 3-3 ACC .................................................................... 3-4 ON ....................................................................... 3-4 START ................................................................ 3-4 Key reminder chime .......................................... 3-5 Ignition switch light (if equipped) .................... 3-5 Key interlock release (AT vehicles only) ........ 3-6
Hazard warning flasher ................................ 3-7 Meters and gauges ....................................... 3-7
Speedometer ..................................................... 3-7 Odometer/Trip meter ........................................ 3-7 Tachometer ........................................................ 3-8 Fuel gauge ......................................................... 3-9 Temperature gauge ........................................... 3-10 Outside temperature indicator ......................... 3-11
Warning and indicator lights ....................... 3-12 Seatbelt warning light and chime .................... 3-13 SRS airbag system warning light .................... 3-13 CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
indicator lamp ................................................. 3-13 Charge warning light ........................................ 3-14 Oil pressure warning light ................................ 3-15 AT OIL TEMPerature warning light
(AT vehicles) ................................................... 3-15 ABS warning light ............................................. 3-15 Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light
(if equipped)/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light (if equipped) ................... 3-16
Brake system warning light ............................. 3-18 Door open warning lights ................................. 3-19
Low fuel warning light ...................................... 3-19 All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT vehicles) ... 3-19 Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light (if equipped) ........................... 3-20 Shift position indicator (AT vehicles) ............. 3-20 Turn signal indicator lights .............................. 3-21 High beam indicator light ................................. 3-21 Cruise control indicator light (if equipped) .... 3-21 Cruise control set indicator light
(if equipped) .................................................... 3-21 Clock .............................................................. 3-22 Light control switch ...................................... 3-23
Headlights ......................................................... 3-23 High/low beam change (dimmer) .................... 3-24 Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-24 Daytime running light system ......................... 3-25
Turn signal lever ........................................... 3-25 Illumination brightness control ................... 3-26 Parking light switch ...................................... 3-27 Fog light button (if equipped) ...................... 3-27 Wiper and washer ......................................... 3-28
Windshield wiper and washer switches ......... 3-29 Rear window wiper and washer switch .......... 3-31
Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) ........ 3-32 Rear window defogger button ..................... 3-33 Mirrors ............................................................ 3-35
Inside mirror ...................................................... 3-35 Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-37
Tilt steering wheel ......................................... 3-39
3-2
Instruments and controls
Horn ............................................................... 3-40
3-3
Instruments and controls
CONTINUED
Instruments and controlsIgnition switch
The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK, ACC, ON and START.
LOCK The key can only be inserted or removed in this posi- tion. The ignition switch will lock the steering wheel when you remove the key. If turning the key is difficult, turn the steering wheel slightly to the right and left as you turn the key.
Automatic transmission vehicles
US3051BA
HS3015BA
HS2020CA
3-4
Instruments and controls
The key can be turned from ACC to LOCK only when the selector lever is in the P position.
Manual transmission vehicles
The key can be turned from ACC to LOCK only when the key is pushed in while turning it.
Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK while the vehicle is being driven or towed be- cause that will lock the steering wheel, prevent- ing steering control. And when the engine is turned off, it takes a much greater effort than
usual to steer. Before leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key from the ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child or others. They could operate the power windows, the sunroof or other controls or even make the vehicle move.
ACC In this position the electrical accessories (radio, ac- cessory power outlet, etc.) can be used.
ON This is the normal operating position after the engine is started.
START The engine is started in this position. The starter cranks the engine to start it. When the key is released (after the engine has started), the key automatically returns to the ON position.
HS2020DA
3-5
Instruments and controls
CONTINUED
Do not turn the ignition switch to the START position while the engine is running.
For models with immobilizer If you fail to start your engine with your registered key, once pull out the key (at this time, the security indicator light blinks), and then insert the key in the ignition switch and turn it to the START position to start your engine again.
NOTE The engine may not start in the following cases:
The key grip is touching another key or a metal- lic key holder.
The key is near another key that contains an im- mobilizer transponder.
Key reminder chime The reminder chime sounds when the drivers door opens and the key is in the LOCK or ACC positions. The chime stops when the key is removed from the ig- nition switch.
Ignition switch light (if equipped) For easy access to the ignition switch in the dark, theUG3049BA
UG3050BA
3-6
Instruments and controls
ignition switch light comes on when drivers door is opened. The light remains on for 10 seconds and goes out after drivers door is closed or if the key is turned to the ON position.
Key interlock release (AT vehicles only)
If the key can not be turned to the LOCK position even when the selector lever is in the P position: 1. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag.
2. Remove the cover under the steering column using a Phillips screwdriver.
3. Turn the ignition key while pressing the key inter- lock release lever. Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer im- mediately to have the key interlock system repaired.
US3052BA
HS3017BA
3-7
Instruments and controls
CONTINUED
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher is used to warn other driv- ers when you have to park your vehicle under emer- gency conditions. The hazard warning flasher works with the ignition switch in any position.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher, push the haz- ard warning button on the instrument panel. To turn off the flasher, push the button again.
NOTE When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work.
Meters and gauges
Speedometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed.
Odometer/Trip meter
A) Trip meter B) Odometer
This meter displays the odometer and two trip meters when the ignition switch is in the LOCK, ACC or ON position.
HS3019BA
A
B US3054BC
3-8
Instruments and controls
Odometer The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle has been driven.
Double trip meter
A) A trip meter B) B trip meter
The trip meter shows the distance that the vehicle has been driven since you last set it to zero. To change the mode indication, briefly push the knob. Each press of the knob changes the function alter- nately.
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob and keep the knob pushed for more than 2 seconds.
To ensure safety, do not attempt to change the function of the indicator during driving, as an accident could result.
NOTE If the connection between the combination meter and battery is broken for any reason such as vehi- cle maintenance or fuse replacement, the data re- corded on the trip meter will be lost.
Tachometer The tachometer shows the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute.
Do not operate the engine with the pointer of the tachometer in the red zone. In this range,
A
B
US3055BC
A trip meter B trip meter
3-9
Instruments and controls
CONTINUED
fuel injection will be cut by the engine control module to protect the engine from overrevving. The engine will resume running normally after the engine speed is reduced below the red zone.
Fuel gauge
A) Low fuel warning light
The fuel gauge shows the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the tank. The gauge does not return to E even though the ig- nition switch is in the ACC or LOCK position.
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel level movement in the tank.
NOTE
You will see the FUEL DOOR sign near the fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler door (lid) is locat- ed on the right side of the vehicle.
Low fuel warning light The low fuel warning light comes on when the tank is nearly empty [about 2.3 US gal (9.0 liters, 1.9 Imp gal)]. It only operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
A
HS3022BC
HS3023AA
3-10
Instruments and controls
NOTE This light does not go out unless the tank is re- plenished up to an internal fuel quantity of about 4.0 US gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).
Promptly put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light comes on. If the engine mis- fired as a result of an empty tank, resulting cat- alytic converter damage could cause damage to the turbocharger.
Temperature gauge
A) Normal operating range
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temper- ature when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The coolant temperature will vary in accordance with the outside temperature and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately until the pointer of the temperature gauge reaches near the middle of the range. Engine operation is optimum with the engine coolant at this temperature range and high revving operation when the engine is not warmed up enough should be avoided.
A
HS3024BC
3-11
Instruments and controls
CONTINUED
If the pointer exceeds the normal operating range, safely stop the vehicle as soon as possi- ble. See In case of emergency in chapter 9.
Outside temperature indicator
MT vehicles A: U.S.-spec. models B: Canada-spec. models
AT vehicles A: U.S.-spec. models B: Canada-spec. models
The outside temperature indicator is located below the odometer/trip meter. The indicator can indicate an out- side temperature ranging from 22 to 122F (30 to 50C).
The indicator can give a false reading under any of the following conditions:
When there is too much sun. During idling; while running at low speeds in a traffic
jam; when the engine is restarted immediately follow- ing a shutdown.
A B
US3050BB
A B
US3056BB
3-12
Instruments and controls
When the actual outside temperature falls outside the specified indicator range.
Warning and indicator lights Several of the warning and indicator lights come on momentarily and then go out when the ignition switch is initially turned to the ON position. This permits checking the operation of the bulbs. Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The following lights come on:
Seatbelt warning light SRS airbag system warning light CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indica- tor lamp Charge warning light Oil pressure warning light AT OIL temperature warning light (AT vehicles) ABS warning light Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light (if equipped)/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light (if equipped) Brake system warning light All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT vehicles) Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light (if equipped) Cruise control indicator light (if equipped) Cruise control set indicator light (if equipped)
If any lights fail to come on, it indicates a burned-out
3-13
Instruments and controls
CONTINUED
bulb or a malfunction of the corresponding system. Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer for repair.
Seatbelt warning light and chime When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the seatbelt warning light will come on and the remind- er chime will sound for about six seconds to remind the driver to fasten the seatbelt. The seatbelt warning light will turn off when the driv- ers side seatbelt is buckled. The seatbelt reminder chime will turn off when the drivers side seatbelt is buckled or it will turn off auto- matically after six seconds.
SRS airbag system warning light When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SRS airbag system warning light will come on for about six seconds and go out. This shows the SRS air- bag and SRS side airbag (if equipped) and seatbelt pretensioners are in normal operation.
If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag sys-
tem. Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly re- paired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbags will operate improperly (e.g. SRS air- bags may inflate in a very minor collision or not inflate in a severe collision), which may in- crease the risk of injury.
Flashing or flickering of the indicator light No illumination of the warning light when the
ignition switch is first turned to the ON posi- tion
Continuous illumination of the warning light Illumination of the warning light while driving
CHECK ENGINE warning light/ Malfunction indicator lamp
If the CHECK ENGINE light comes on while you are driving, have your vehicle checked/repaired by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could cause serious damage,
3-14
Instruments and controls
which may not be covered by your vehicles warranty.
If this light comes on steadily or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate that there is a problem or po- tential problem somewhere in the emission control system.
If the light comes on steadily: If the light comes on steadily while driving or does not go out after the engine starts, an emission control sys- tem malfunction has been detected. You should have your vehicle checked by an autho- rized SUBARU dealer immediately.
NOTE This light also comes on when the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks. If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indica- tor lamp coming on could be a loose or missing fuel fill- er cap. Remove the cap and retighten it until it clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap will not make the CHECK EN- GINE warning light turn off immediately. It may take several driving trips. If the light does not go out, take your vehicle to your authorized SUBARU dealer im-
mediately.
If the light is blinking: If the light is blinking while driving, an engine misfire condition has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To prevent serious damage to the emission control system, you should do the following:
Reduce vehicle speed. Avoid hard acceleration. Avoid steep uphill grades. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possible. Stop towing a trailer as soon as possible.
The CHECK ENGINE warning light may stop blinking and come on steadily after several driving trips. You should have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
Charge warning light If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not working properly.
If the light comes on while driving or does not go out after the engine starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, broken or if the belt is in good condition but the
3-15
Instruments and controls
CONTINUED
light remains on, contact your nearest SUBARU deal- er immediately.
Oil pressure warning light If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the engine oil pressure is low and the lubricating system is not working properly. If the light comes on while driving or does not go out after the engine starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the engine oil level. If the oil lev- el is low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is at the proper level but the light remains on, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.
Do not operate the engine with the oil pressure warning light on. This may cause serious en- gine damage.
AT OIL TEMPerature warning light (AT vehicles)
The AT oil temperature warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after about two seconds.
If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the automatic transmission fluid tem- perature is too hot.
If the light comes on while driving, it is unnecessary to stop the vehicle, but avoid driving up steep grades or in stop and go traffic.
Automatic transmission control system warn- ing
If the light flashes after the engine starts, it may indi- cate that the automatic transmission control system is not working properly. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for service immediately.
ABS warning light The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after about two seconds. This is an indication that the ABS system is working properly.
If the warning light behaves as follows, the ABS system may not work properly. When the warning light is on, the ABS function shuts down; however, the conventional brake
(U.S.) (Canada)
3-16
Instruments and controls
system continues to operate normally. The warning light does not come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position. The warning light comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, but it does not go out even when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).
The warning light comes on during driving.
If these occur, have the ABS system repaired at the first available opportunity by your SUBARU dealer.
With a vehicle equipped with an EBD system, the ABS warning light comes on together with the brake system warning light if the EBD system becomes faulty. For further details of the EBD system fault warning, refer to Brake system warning light.
NOTE If the warning light behavior is as described be- low, the ABS system may be considered normal.
The warning light comes on right after the en- gine is started but goes out immediately, remain- ing off.
The warning light remains on after the engine has been started, but it goes out when the vehicle
speed reaches about 8 mph (12 km/h). The warning light comes on during driving, but
it goes out immediately and remains off. When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such as when the engine is jump started, the ABS warning light may come on. This is due to the low battery volt- age and does not indicate a malfunction. When the battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out.
Vehicle Dynamics Control warn- ing light (if equipped)/Vehicle Dy- namics Control OFF indicator light (if equipped)
This warning light has the function of indicating faults in the Vehicle Dynamics Control system and the func- tion of indicating that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system has been deactivated. It comes on in the event of a fault in the system and is on when the system is not operating. This warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after the engine has started. It indicates that the Vehicle Dy- namics Control system is in normal operation.
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably in-
3-17
Instruments and controls
CONTINUED
operative under any of the following conditions. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer immediate- ly.
The warning light does not come on when the igni- tion switch is turned to the ON position.
The warning light comes on while the vehicle is run- ning.
If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system itself becomes faulty, the warning light only comes on. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- tem) remains fully operational.
The warning light comes on when the electronic control system of the ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system becomes faulty. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system provides its ABS control through the electrical circuit of the ABS system. Accordingly, if the ABS is inoperative, the Ve- hicle Dynamics Control system becomes unable to provide ABS control. As a result, the Vehicle Dynam- ics Control system also becomes inoperative, causing the warning light to come on. Though both the Vehicle Dynamics Control and ABS systems are inoperative in this case, the ordinary functions of the brake system are still available. You will be safe while driving with this condition, but have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE If the warning light behavior is as shown below, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system may be con- sidered normal.
The warning light comes on right after the en- gine is started but goes out immediately, remain- ing off.
The warning light comes on after engine startup and goes off while the vehicle is subsequently be- ing driven.
The warning light comes on during driving, but it goes out immediately and remains off.
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light It comes on when the Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF switch is pressed. It also comes on when the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system is deactivated.
NOTE The light may stay on for a while after the engine
has been started, especially in cold weather. This does not indicate the existence of a problem. The light should go out as soon as the engine has warmed up.
The indicator light comes on when the engine has developed a problem and the Malfunction in- dicator light is on.
3-18
Instruments and controls
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably faulty under the following condition. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
The light does not go out even after the lapse of sev- eral minutes (the engine has warmed up) after the en- gine has started.
Brake system warning light
Driving with the brake system warning light on is dangerous. This indicates your brake sys- tem may not be working properly. If the light re- mains on, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer immediately.
If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
This light has the following three functions:
Parking brake warning The light comes on with the parking brake applied while the ignition switch is in the ON position. It goes out when the parking brake is fully released.
Brake fluid level warning This light comes on when the brake fluid level has dropped to near the MIN level of the brake fluid res- ervoir with the ignition switch in the ON position and with the parking brake fully released.
If the brake system warning light should come on while driving (with the parking brake fully released and with the ignition switch positioned in ON), it could be an indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn brake pads. If this occurs, immediately stop the vehicle at the near- est safe place and check the brake fluid level. If the flu- id level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the near- est SUBARU dealer for repair.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) sys- tem warning (for vehicles with EBD)
The brake system warning light also illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the EBD system. In that event, it comes on together with the ABS warning light. The EBD system may be malfunctioning if the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simultaneously during driving. Even if the EBD system fails, the conventional braking system will still function. However, the rear wheels will be more prone to locking when the brakes are applied harder than usual and the vehicles motion may there-
(U.S.) (Canada)
3-19
Instruments and controls
CONTINUED
fore become somewhat harder to control. If the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simultaneously, take the following steps: 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat place. 2. Shut down the engine, then restart it. 3. Release the parking brake. If both warning lights go out, the EBD system may be faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected. 4. If both warning lights come on again and stay illu- minated after the engine has been restarted, shut down the engine again, apply the parking brake, and check the brake fluid level. 5. If the brake fluid level is not below the MIN mark, the EBD system may be faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system inspect- ed. 6. If the brake fluid level is below the MIN mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Instead, have the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
Door open warning lights The door open warning light comes on if any door or the rear gate is not fully closed.
Always make sure this light is out before you start to
drive.
Low fuel warning light The low fuel warning light comes on when the tank is nearly empty [about 2.3 US gal (9.0 liters, 1.9 Imp gal)]. It only operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
NOTE This light does not go out unless the tank is re- plenished up to an internal fuel quantity of about 4.0 US gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).
All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT vehicles)
Continued driving with the AWD warning light flashing can lead to powertrain damage. If the AWD warning light flashes, promptly park in a safe place then check whether all four tires are the same diameter and whether any of the tires has a puncture or has lost air pressure for some other reason.
3-20
Instruments and controls
The All-Wheel Drive indicator light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after the engine has started.
For vehicles with Vehicle Dynamics Control system
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires of dif- ferent diameters or with the air pressure excessively low in any of its tires.
For vehicles without Vehicle Dynamics Control system
This light comes on when All-Wheel Drive is disen- gaged and the drive mechanism is switched to Front Wheel Drive for maintenance or similar purposes. This light flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires of dif- ferent diameters or with the air pressure excessively low in any of its tires.
Vehicle Dynamics Control opera- tion indicator light (if equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition switch is ON and goes out about 2 seconds later. It blinks when the skid suppression function is activat- ed. It illuminates when only the traction control func- tion is operating.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably faulty under any of the following conditions. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer immediately.
The light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
The light does not go out even after a period of about 2 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned to the ON position.
Shift position indicator (AT vehicles)
This indicator shows the position of the shift lever.
US3058AA
3-21
Instruments and controls
CONTINUED
Turn signal indicator lights These lights show the operation of the turn signal or lane change signal. If the indicator lights do not blink or blink rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Refer to the Replacing bulbs section in chapter 11.
High beam indicator light This light shows that the headlights are in the high beam mode. This indicator light also comes on when the headlight flasher is operated.
Cruise control indicator light (if equipped)
The cruise control indicator light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after about three seconds. This light comes on when the CRUISE main switch is pressed.
NOTE If you move the cruise control lever while turn-
ing the ignition switch ON, the cruise control function is deactivated and the cruise control indi-
cator light flashes. To reactivate the cruise control function, turn the ignition switch back to the ACC or LOCK position, and then turn it again to the ON position.
If this indicator light and the indicator light flash simultaneously during driving, have the vehicle checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
Cruise control set indicator light (if equipped)
The cruise control set indicator light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after about three seconds. This light comes on when vehicle speed has been set.
3-22
Instruments and controls
Clock
To adjust the clock, open the small article storage compartment in the dashboard with the vehicle parked in a safe place.
To set the hour, press the H button. To set the min- utes, press the M button. To reset the minutes to 00 with a radio time signal, push the Reset button.
To ensure safety, do not attempt to set the time while driving, as an accident from inadequate attention to the road could result.
HS3025BA
HS3018BA
3-23
Instruments and controls
CONTINUED
Light control switch The light switch operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
To prevent battery discharge resulting from ac- cidentally leaving your lights on when your ve- hicle is parked, the light switch operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON posi- tion. In any other position, the vehicles lights will be out. If you park your vehicle on a roadside at night, use the hazard warning flasher to alert the other drivers.
Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on the end of the turn signal lever.
first position: Parking lights, instrument panel illumination, tail lights and license plate light are on.
second position: Headlights, parking lights, instrument panel illumina- tion, tail lights, and license plate light are on.
HS3026BA
3-24
Instruments and controls
High/low beam change (dimmer)
To change from low beam to high beam, push the turn signal lever forward. When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indicator light on the in- strument panel is also on. To switch back to low beam, pull the lever back to the detent position.
Headlight flasher
To flash the headlights, pull the lever toward you and then release it. The high beam will stay on for as long as you hold the lever. The headlight flasher works even though the lighting switch is in the OFF posi- tion.
When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indicator light on the instrument panel also comes on.
Do not hold the lever in the flashing position for
US3059BA HS3026DA
3-25
Instruments and controls
CONTINUED
more than just a few seconds.
Daytime running light system
The tail lights, parking lights, and side marker lights are not turned on by the daytime running light system. The light switch must always be turned to the position when it is dark outside.
The low beam headlights will automatically come on at reduced brightness when the engine has started, un- der the following conditions:
The parking brake is fully released. The light switch is in the OFF or position. The automatic transmission selector lever is set at
other than the P position.
Turn signal lever
A) Right turn B) Left turn C) Lane change for right D) Lane change for left
To activate the right turn signal, push the turn signal le- ver up. To activate the left turn signal, push the turn signal lever down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically. If the lever does not return af- ter cornering, return the lever to the neutral position by hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn signal lever up
A
B
C
D
HS3027BD
3-26
Instruments and controls
or down slightly and hold it during the lane change. The turn signal indicator lights will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. The lever will return auto- matically to the neutral position when you release it.
Illumination brightness control
When the headlight switch is in the or position, you can adjust brightness of the instrument panel illumination for better visibility. To brighten, turn the control dial upward. To darken, turn the control dial downward.
HS3028BA
3-27
Instruments and controls
CONTINUED
Parking light switch
The parking light switch operates regardless of the ig- nition switch position.
By pushing the front end of this switch, following lights will come on. Parking lights Tail lights License plate lights
To turn off, push the rear end of the parking light switch. Avoid leaving these lights on for a long time because that will run down the battery.
Fog light button (if equipped)
The fog lights operate only when the headlights are on low beam. Push the fog light button to turn the fog lights on. Press the button again to turn them off. The indicator light located on the button will illuminate when the fog lights are on.
P
UG3043BA HS3030AA
3-28
Instruments and controls
Wiper and washer
In freezing weather, do not use the windshield washer until the windshield is sufficiently warmed by the defroster. Otherwise the washer fluid can freeze on the windshield, blocking your view.
Do not operate the washer continuously for more than ten seconds, or when the washer flu- id tank is empty. This may cause overheating of the washer motor. Check the washer fluid level frequently, such as at fuel stops.
Do not operate the wipers when the wind- shield or rear window is dry. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield or rear window, always use the windshield washer.
In freezing weather, be sure that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield or rear window before switching on the wipers. At-
tempting to operate the wiper with the blades frozen to the window glass could cause not only the wiper blades to be damaged but also the wiper motor to burn out. If the wiper blade is frozen to the window glass, be sure to oper- ate the defroster, windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) or rear window defogger before turn- ing on the wiper.
If the wipers stop during operation because of ice or some other obstruction on the window, the wiper motor could burn out even if the wiper switch is turned off. If this occurs, promptly stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and clean the window glass to allow proper wiper operation.
Use clean water if windshield washer fluid is unavailable. In areas where water freezes in winter, use SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid or the equivalent. (See the Windshield washer fluid section in chapter 11.) Also, when driving the vehicle when there are freezing temperatures, use non-freezing type wiper blades.
Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzene. This will cause deterioration of the wiper
3-29
Instruments and controls
CONTINUED
blades.
NOTE The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACC position. Clean your wiper blades and window glass peri-
odically with a washer solution to prevent streak- ing, and to remove accumulations of road salt or road film. Keep the washer button depressed at least for 1 second so that washer solution will be sprinkled all over the windshield or rear window.
Grease, wax, insects or other material on the windshield or the wiper blade results in jerky wip- er operation and streaking on the glass. If you can- not remove those streaks after operating the washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield or rear window and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the window glass and wiper blades with clean water. The glass is clean if no beads form on the glass when you rinse with wa- ter.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this procedure, replace the wiper blades with new ones. Refer to the Replacement of wiper
blades section (chapter 11) for replacement in- structions.
Windshield wiper and washer switches Windshield wipers
A) OFF B) : Intermittent C) LO: Low speed D) HI: High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper control lever down. To turn the wipers off, return the lever to the OFF po-
A
B
C
D HS3031BC
3-30
Instruments and controls
sition.
Wiper intermittent time control (if equipped)
When the wiper switch is in the position, turn the dial to adjust the operating interval of the wiper.
The operating interval can be adjusted continuously from the shortest interval to the longest. Two click stop positions of the dial may help you to aim at your desired interval.
Mist (for a single wipe)
For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the lever toward you. The wipers operate until you release the lever.
HS3032BA
HS3033BA
3-31
Instruments and controls
CONTINUED
Washer
To wash the windshield, push the washer button at the end of the wiper control lever. The washer fluid sprays until you release the washer button. The wipers oper- ate while you push the button.
Rear window wiper and washer switch
A) INT B) ON C) Washer
Rear wiper To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on the end of the wiper control lever upward.
INT: Intermittent ON: Normal
To turn the wiper off, return the knob on the end of the lever to the OFF position.
HS3033CA
REAR ON
OFF INT
C
B
A
C
HS3034BC
3-32
Instruments and controls
Washer To wash the rear window while the rear wiper is oper- ating, turn the knob on the end of the wiper control le- ver counterclockwise to the position. The washer fluid sprays until you release the knob. To wash the rear window when the rear wiper is not in use, turn the knob on the end of the wiper control lever clockwise to the position. The washer fluid sprays and the wiper operates until you release the knob.
Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
The windshield wiper deicer operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Before turning on the windshield wiper deicer, remove any snow from the windshield. To turn on the wind- shield wiper deicer, push the button. The indicator light located on the button lights up while the windshield wiper deicer is operating. The windshield wiper deicer will automatically shut off after about 15 minutes. If the wiper blades have been deiced completely before that time, push the button to turn it off. It also turns off when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position. If deicing is
HS3045AA
3-33
Instruments and controls
CONTINUED
not complete, you have to push the button to turn the deicer on again.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the windshield wiper deicer con- tinuously for any longer than necessary.
NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with the outside mirror defogger, the outside mirror defogger operates while the windshield wiper deicer is operating.
Rear window defogger button
Manual climate control system
HS4012DA
3-34
Instruments and controls
Automatic climate control system
The rear window defogger operates only when the ig- nition switch is in the ON position. The rear window defogger button is located on the cli- mate control panel.
The defogger will automatically shut off after about 15 minutes. If the window clears before that time, push the button to turn it off. It also turns off when the igni- tion switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position. If defrosting or defogging is desired when you restart your vehicle, you have to push the button to turn it on again. To turn on the defogger, push the button. To turn it off,
push the button again. The indicator light located on the button lights up while the rear window defogger is operating. Turn on the rear window defogger if the wiper is frozen to the glass.
Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner surface of the rear window. They may damage the conductors printed on the window.
To prevent the battery from being dis- charged, do not operate the defogger continu- ously for any longer than necessary.
US3057BA
3-35
Instruments and controls
CONTINUED
Mirrors Always check that the inside and outside mirrors are properly adjusted before you start driving.
Inside mirror
A) Tab
The inside mirror has a day and night position. Pull the tab at the bottom of the mirror toward you for the night position. Push it away for the day position. The night position reduces glare from headlights.
Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped)
A) Left button B) Auto dimming indicator C) Photosensor D) Right button
The inside electronic compass mirror has an anti-glare feature which automatically reduces glare coming from headlights of vehicles behind you. It also con- tains a built-in compass.
By pressing and releasing the left button, the auto- matic dimming function is toggled on or off. When the automatic dimming function is on, the auto dimming in- dicator light (green) located to the right of the button
A HS3036BC
A
B C
D
HS3037BC
3-36
Instruments and controls
will illuminate. By pressing and releasing the right button, the com-
pass display is toggled on or off. When the compass is on, an illuminated compass reading will appear in the lower part of the mirror.
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode, the mirror sur- face turns bright if the transmission is shifted into re- verse. This is to ensure good rearward visibility during reversing.
Photosensors
The mirror has a photosensor attached on both the front and back sides. If the glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you strikes the mirror, these sensors
detect it and make the reflection surface of the mirror dimmer to help prevent you from being blinded. For this reason, use care not to cover the sensors with stickers, or other similar items. Periodically wipe the sensors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton cloth or an applicator.
Compass calibration 1. For optimum calibration, switch off all nonessential electrical accessories (rear window defogger, heater/ air conditioning system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all doors are shut. 2. Drive to an open, level area away from large metal- lic objects or structures and make certain the ignition switch is in the ON position. 3. Press and hold the left button for 3 seconds then re- lease, and the compass will enter the calibration mode. CAL and direction will be displayed. 4. Drive slowly in a circle until CAL disappears from the display (about two or three circles). 5. The compass is now calibrated. Further calibration is not required. The compass will automatically cali- brate from this point forward.
HS3038BA
3-37
Instruments and controls
CONTINUED
Compass zone adjustment
Compass calibration zones
1. The zone setting is factory preset to Zone 8. Refer to the Compass calibration zone map shown above or one attached to the end of this manual to verify that the compass zone setting is correct for your geograph- ical location. 2. Press and hold the right button for 3 seconds then release, and the word ZONE will briefly appear and then the zone number will be displayed. 3. Press the right hand button repeatedly to cycle the display through all possible zone settings. Stop cycling when the correct zone setting for your location is dis-
played. 4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will exit the zone setting mode.
Outside mirrors
Convex mirror (passenger side)
Objects look smaller in a convex mirror and far- ther away than when viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the convex mirror to judge the distance of vehicles behind you when changing lanes. Use the inside mirror (or glance backwards) to
10
9 876
5
4
3
11
12
13
HGF048AA
HS3040BA
3-38
Instruments and controls
determine the actual size and distance of ob- jects that you view in convex mirror.
Remote control mirror switch
A) Selection switch B) Direction control switch
The remote control mirrors operate only when the ig- nition switch is in the ON or ACC position. 1. Press either end of the selection switch, L for the left, R for the right. 2. Move the direction control switch in the direction you want to move the mirror.
3. Return the selection switch to the neutral position to prevent unintentional operation.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually.
Outside mirror defogger
A) Outside mirror defogger button (if equipped) B) Outside mirror defogger and windshield wiper deicer
button (if equipped)
The outside mirror defogger operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position. To turn on the outside mirror defogger, push the but- ton. To turn it off, push the button again. The indicator light located on the button lights up while the outside
MIRROR
L RA
B
HS3041BC
A B
HS3046AC
3-39
Instruments and controls
CONTINUED
mirror defogger is operating.
The defogger will automatically shut off after about 15 minutes. If the mirror clears before that time, push the button to turn it off. It also turns off when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position. If de- frosting or defogging is desired when you restart your vehicle, you have to push the button to turn it on again.
NOTE On vehicles equipped with a windshield wiper de- icer, the windshield wiper deicer switch is also used to operate the outside mirror defogger.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the defogger continuously for any longer than necessary.
Tilt steering wheel
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to the Front seats section (chapter 1). 2. Push the tilt lock lever down. 3. Move the steering wheel to the desired level. 4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place. 5. Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked by moving it up and down.
Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt position while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle
US3053BA
3-40
Instruments and controls
control and result in personal injury. Horn
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
UG3034BA
4-1
4
Climate control
Ventilator ....................................................... 4-2 Air flow selection .............................................. 4-2 Center and side ventilators .............................. 4-3
Manual climate control system ................... 4-4 Control panel ..................................................... 4-4 Heater operation ............................................... 4-6 Air conditioner operation (if equipped) .......... 4-9
Automatic climate control system (if equipped) .............................................. 4-11 Control panel ..................................................... 4-11 To use as full-automatic climate control
system ............................................................. 4-12 To use as semi-automatic climate control
system ............................................................. 4-12 Fan speed control dial ...................................... 4-12 Temperature control dial .................................. 4-13 Air flow control dial .......................................... 4-13 Air inlet selection button .................................. 4-14 Air conditioner button ...................................... 4-15 Temperature sensors ....................................... 4-16
Operating tips for heater and air conditioner ................................................ 4-17 Cleaning ventilation grille ................................ 4-17 Efficient cooling after parking in direct
sunlight ........................................................... 4-17 Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
circuit .............................................................. 4-17 Checking air conditioning system before
summer season .............................................. 4-17 Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity
and low temperature weather conditions .... 4-18
Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine is heavily loaded ................................ 4-18
Refrigerant for your climate control system .. 4-18 Air filtration system (if equipped) ................ 4-18
Replacing an air filter ....................................... 4-19
4-2
Climate control
Climate controlVentilator
Air flow selection
US4033BA
4-3
Climate control
CONTINUED
Center and side ventilators Center ventilators
Move the tab up and down or right and left to adjust the flow direction.
Side ventilators
A) Open B) Close
Move the tab up and down or right and left to adjust the flow direction. To open or close the ventilator, turn the thumb-wheel up or down.
HS4009BA
HS4010BC
A
B
4-4
Climate control
Manual climate control system
Control panel
A) Temperature control dial B) Fan speed control dial C) Air flow control dial D) Rear window defogger button (Refer to the Rear win-
dow defogger button in chapter 3.) E) Air conditioner button (if equipped) F) Air inlet selection button
Temperature control dial This dial regulates the temperature of air flow from the air outlets over a range from the blue side (cool) to red
side (warm).
Fan speed control dial The fan operates only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. The fan speed control dial is used to select four fan speeds.
Air flow control dial This dial has the following five positions:
: Air flows through the instrument panel outlets.
: Air flows through the instrument panel outlets and the foot outlets.
: Air flows through the foot outlets and some through the windshield defroster outlets.
: Air flows through the windshield defroster outlets and foot outlets.
: Air flows through the windshield defroster outlets.
NOTE When the dial is placed in the or po- sition, the air conditioner compressor operates automatically regardless of the position of the air conditioner button to defog the windshield quick- ly. However the indicator on the air conditioner
HS4011BC
A B C
FED
4-5
Climate control
CONTINUED
button will not come on. At the same time, the air inlet selection is automatically set to outside air mode. In this state, you cannot select recirculation mode by manually pressing the air inlet selection button. Also, you cannot stop the air conditioner com- pressor by pressing the air conditioner button.
Air conditioner button (if equipped)
The air conditioner operates only when the engine is running.
Push the air conditioner button while the fan is in op- eration to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light
will come on.
Push it again to turn off the air conditioner.
Air inlet selection button
ON position (Recirculation): Interior air is recirculat- ed inside the vehicle. Push the air inlet selection but- ton to the ON position. The indicator light will come on. Place the air inlet selection button to the ON position for fast cooling with the air conditioner or when driving on a dusty road.
OFF position (Outside air): Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. Push the air inlet selec- tion button again to the OFF position. The indicator
HS4012BA
HS4012CA
4-6
Climate control
light will go off. Place the air inlet selection button to the OFF position when the interior has cooled to a comfortable temper- ature and the road is no longer dusty.
Continued operation with the air inlet selection button in the ON position may fog up the win- dows. Switch to the OFF position as soon as the outside dusty condition clears.
Heater operation Defrosting or defogging the windshield
To direct warm air to the windshield and front door win- dows: 1. Set the air flow control dial to the position. 2. Turn the temperature control dial all the way to the right. 3. Set the fan speed control dial to the highest speed.
If your vehicle is equipped with an air conditioner, when the or position is selected, the air conditioner compressor automatically operates re- gardless of the position of the air conditioner button to
HS4013AA
4-7
Climate control
CONTINUED
defog the windshield quickly. However, the air conditioner indicator light does not come on at this time.
NOTE Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To stop warm air flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding thumb-wheel down.
Heating and defrosting
To direct warm air toward the floor and the windshield: 1. Set the air flow control dial to the position. 2. Set the temperature control dial to the most com- fortable level. 3. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.
If your vehicle is equipped with an air conditioner, when the or position is selected, the air conditioner compressor automatically operates re- gardless of the position of the air conditioner button to defog the windshield quickly. However, the air conditioner indicator light does not come on at this time.
NOTE Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To stop warm air flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding thumb-wheel down.
Heating
To direct warm air toward the floor:
HS4014AA
HS4015AA
4-8
Climate control
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF posi- tion. 2. Set the air flow control dial to the position. 3. Set the temperature control dial to the most com- fortable level. 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.
NOTE Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To stop warm air flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding thumb-wheel down.
Bi-level heating
This setting allows you to direct air of different temper-
atures from the instrument panel and foot outlets. The air from the foot outlets is slightly warmer than from the instrument panel outlets. 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF posi- tion. 2. Set the air flow control dial to the position. 3. Set the temperature control dial to the desired tem- perature level. 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.
Setting the temperature control dial fully turned to the red area or blue area decreases the temperature dif- ference between the air from the instrument panel out- lets and the air from the foot outlets.
HS4016AA
4-9
Climate control
CONTINUED
Ventilation
To force outside air through the instrument panel out- lets: 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF posi- tion. 2. Set the air flow control dial to the position. 3. Set the temperature control dial all the way left. 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.
When driving on a dusty road, set the air inlet selection button to the ON position.
Continued operation with the air inlet selection button in the ON position may fog up the win- dows. Switch to the OFF position as soon as the outside dusty condition clears.
Air conditioner operation (if equipped) Cooling or dehumidifying
A) ON position
For cooling and dehumidification of the passenger
HS4017AA
HS4018BCA
4-10
Climate control
compartment, performing the following steps will allow air to flow through the instrument panel outlets: 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF posi- tion. 2. Set the air flow control dial to the position. 3. Set the air conditioner button to the ON position. 4. Set the temperature control dial to the blue side. 5. Set the fan speed control dial at the highest speed.
Defrosting or defogging
To direct warm air to the windshield and front door win- dows: 1. Set the air flow control dial to the position. 2. Set the temperature control dial to the red side.
3. Set the fan speed control dial at the highest speed.
The air conditioner compressor automatically oper- ates when the air flow control dial set in the or position to provide better defogging perfor- mance. However, the air conditioner indicator light does not come on at this time.
HS4013AA
4-11
Climate control
CONTINUED
Automatic climate control system (if equipped) Although this climate control system can be used as a full-automatic climate control system, it can also, if de- sired, be used as a semi-automatic climate control system. When it is used as a full-automatic climate control sys- tem, the outlet air temperature, fan speed, air flow dis- tribution, air inlet control, and air conditioner compres- sor operation are all automatically controlled to main- tain a constant, comfortable temperature inside the vehicle.
NOTE Operate the automatic climate control system
when the engine is running. When the engine coolant is cold, the blower
does not run. In the AUTO mode, when the air temperature
in the passenger compartment is sufficiently cool, the air conditioner compressor does not operate. For efficient defogging or dehumidifying in cold weather, press the A/C button to operate the air conditioner compressor.
Even when cooling is not necessary, setting the temperature much lower than the current outlet air
temperature turns on the air conditioner compres- sor automatically and the A/C indicator light on the control panel comes on.
Control panel
A) Temperature control dial B) Fan speed control dial C) Air flow control dial D) Air conditioner button E) Air inlet selection button F) Rear window defogger button (Refer to the Rear win-
dow defogger button in chapter 3.)
C
E FD
BA
US4034BC
4-12
Climate control
To use as full-automatic climate con- trol system
Place the temperature control dial in the position for your desired temperature, then set the other dials and buttons as described below. The systems functions will then switch to AUTO mode and be controlled au- tomatically.
Air flow control dial: AUTO position Fan speed control dial: AUTO position Air inlet selection button: Press for at least 1 sec-
ond. (Indicator will flash twice.) Air conditioner button: Press for at least 1 second.
(Indicator will flash twice.)
To use as semi-automatic climate con- trol system
Each function can be individually set to AUTO mode independently of the others. Any function set to AUTO mode is controlled automatically. Any function not set to AUTO mode can be manually adjusted as desired. The temperature can be set within a range of 65 to 85F (20 to 30C).
Fan speed control dial
The fan operates only with the ignition switch in the ON position. The fan speed control dial is used to se- lect the AUTO (automatic control) mode or to select the desired fan speed. The dials positions and their functions are as follows: OFF: The fan does not operate. AUTO: The fan speed is adjusted automatically in ac- cordance with the air temperature inside and outside the passenger compartment, the intensity of sunlight, and other factors. SUBARU recommends using the AUTO position. Other positions: The fan speed can be adjusted in seven steps.
US4035BA
4-13
Climate control
CONTINUED
NOTE With the fan speed control dial in the AUTO posi- tion and the air flow control dial in the , , or position, the fan does not oper- ate during engine warmup until the engine coolant temperature exceeds approx. 122F (50C).
Temperature control dial
This dial is used to set the desired interior tempera- ture. With the dial set to your desired temperature, the system automatically adjusts the temperature of air supplied from the outlets such that the desired temper- ature is achieved and maintained.
If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise, the system gives maximum cooling performance. If the dial is turned fully clockwise, the system gives maximum heating performance.
Air flow control dial
This dial has the following six positions. The outlets from which air is supplied in each position are as fol- lows: AUTO: The air flow control is adjusted automatically in accordance with the air temperature inside and out- side the passenger compartment, the intensity of sun- light, and other factors. SUBARU recommends using
65
75
85
US4036BA
US3057CA
4-14
Climate control
the AUTO position.
: Instrument panel outlets : Instrument panel outlets and foot outlets : Foot outlets and windshield defroster outlets (rel-
atively little air from windshield defroster outlets) : Windshield defroster outlets and foot outlets : Windshield defroster outlets
NOTE When the dial is placed in the or po- sition, the air conditioner compressor operates automatically to defog the windshield quickly. At the same time, the air inlet selection is automati- cally set to outside air mode.
Air inlet selection button
ON position (Recirculation): Interior air is recirculat- ed inside the vehicle. Push the air inlet selection but- ton to the ON position for fast cooling with the air con- ditioner or when driving on a dusty road. The indicator light will come on. OFF position (Outside Air): Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. Push the air inlet selec- tion button to the OFF position when the interior has cooled to a comfortable temperature and the road is no longer dusty. The indicator light will go off. AUTO: When the air inlet selection button is pressed for at least one second, the indicator flashes twice. The air inlet control is then adjusted automatically in
US4035CA
4-15
Climate control
CONTINUED
accordance with the air temperature inside and out- side the passenger compartment, the intensity of sun- light, and other factors. Pressing the air inlet selection button cancels the AUTO mode. SUBARU recom- mends using the AUTO position.
Continued operation in the ON position may fog up the windows. Switch to the OFF position as soon as the outside dusty condition clears.
Air conditioner button
The buttons positions and their functions are as fol- lows: ON: The air conditioner operates while the fan is run- ning. Push the button to select this position. The indicator light will illuminate. OFF:The air conditioner does not operate. Push the button a second time to select this position. The indicator light will go off. AUTO: When the button is pressed for at least one second, the indicator flashes twice. The air conditioner compressor operation is then adjusted automatically in accordance with the air temperature inside and out- side the passenger compartment, the intensity of sun- light, and other factors. Pressing the button cancels the AUTO mode. SUBARU recommends using the AUTO position.
NOTE The air conditioners compressor does not oper- ate with an outside temperature of 32F (0C) or lower.
65
75
85
US4036CA
4-16
Climate control
Temperature sensors
A) Interior air temperature sensor B) Solar sensor
The automatic climate control system employs several sensors. These sensors are delicate. If they are not treated properly and become damaged, the system may not be able to control the interior temperature cor- rectly. To avoid damaging the sensors, observe the following precautions: Do not subject the sensors to impact. Keep water away from the sensors. Do not cover the sensors.
The sensors are located as follows: Solar sensor: beside the windshield defroster grille. Interior air temperature sensor: near the ignition switch. Outside temperature sensor: behind the front grille.
B
A
US4037BC
4-17
Climate control
CONTINUED
Operating tips for heater and air con- ditioner
Cleaning ventilation grille
Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. Since the condenser is located in front of the radiator, this area should be kept clean because cooling performance is impaired by any ac- cumulation of insects and leaves on the condenser.
Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with the windows open for a few minutes to allow outside air to circulate into the heated interior. This results in quicker cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the windows closed during the operation of the air conditioner for maximum cool- ing efficiency.
Lubrication oil circulation in the refrig- erant circuit
Operate the air conditioner compressor at a low en- gine speed (at idle or low driving speeds) a few min- utes each month during the off-season to circulate its oil.
Checking air conditioning system be- fore summer season
Check the air conditioner unit for refrigerant leaks, hose conditions, and proper operation each spring. This check is best performed by your SUBARU dealer.
HS4022CA
4-18
Climate control
Cooling and dehumidifying in high hu- midity and low temperature weather conditions
Under certain weather conditions (high relative humid- ity, low temperatures, etc.) a small amount of water vapor emission from the air outlets may be noticed. This condition is normal and does not indicate any problem with the air conditioning system.
Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine is heavily loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage, the air con- ditioner compressor is designed to temporarily shut off during air conditioner operation whenever the acceler- ator is fully depressed such as during rapid accelera- tion or when driving on a steep upgrade.
Refrigerant for your climate control system
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the method of adding, changing or checking the refrigerant is different from the method for CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU dealer for service. Repairs needed as a result of using the wrong refrigerant are not covered under warranty.
Air filtration system (if equipped) If your vehicles air conditioning system is equipped with an air filtration system, replace the filter element according to the replacement schedule shown below. This schedule should be followed to maintain the fil- ters dust collection ability. Under extremely dusty con- ditions, the filter should be replaced more frequently. It is recommended that you have your filter checked or replaced by your SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
Replacement schedule: Every 12 months or 7,500 miles (12,000 km) whichev- er comes first
4-19
Climate control
CONTINUED
Replacing an air filter 0
1. Remove the glove box. 1)Open the glove box. 2)Remove the nine screws securing the glove box.
A) Air filter cover
2. Remove the air filter cover.
HS4024BA
A HS4025BC
4-20
Climate control
A) Air filter element B) Arrow mark
3. Replace the air filter element with new one.
The arrow mark on the filter must point UP.
A) Air filter cover
4. Reinstall the air filter cover.
A B HS4026BC A HS4025CC
4-21
Climate control
CONTINUED
5. Reinstall the glove box. 6. Close the glove box.
A) Service label B) Caution label
7. LABEL installation 1)Fill out the information on the service label (small). 2)Attach the service label to the driver side door pil- lar and the caution label to the driver side end of the instrument panel.
Contact your dealer if the following occurs, even if it is not yet time to change the filter: Reduction of the air flow through the vents.
HS4024BA
A
B
US4528BB
4-22
Climate control
Windshield gets easily fogged or misted.
NOTE The filter can influence the air conditioning, heat- ing and defroster performance if not properly maintained.
5-1
5
Audio
Antenna system ............................................ 5-2 FM reception ..................................................... 5-2
Installation of accessories ........................... 5-3 Audio set ........................................................ 5-3
Type A audio set ............................................... 5-3 Type B audio set ............................................... 5-4 In-dash 6 CD auto changer (Optional audio
unit if equipped) .......................................... 5-4 Type A audio set (if equipped) ..................... 5-5
Radio operation ................................................ 5-5 Compact disc player operation ....................... 5-10 CD changer control (if optional in-dash CD
changer is connected) ................................... 5-13 Type B audio set (if equipped) ..................... 5-16
Radio operation ................................................ 5-16 Built-in CD changer operation ......................... 5-22
In-dash 6 CD auto changer (if equipped) .... 5-27 Loading and unloading compact discs .......... 5-27
Precautions to observe when handling a compact disc .......................................... 5-30
5-2
Audio
AudioAntenna system
The antenna is printed on the inside of the left side rear quarter window glass.
Do not use sharp instruments or window clean- er containing abrasives to clean the inner sur- face of the window on which the antenna is printed. Doing so may damage the antenna printed on the window.
FM reception Although FM is normally static free, reception can be affected by the surrounding area, atmospheric condi- tions, station strength and transmitter distance. Build- ings or other obstructions may cause momentary stat- ic, flutter or station interference. If reception continues to be unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.
HS5008BA
5-3
Audio
CONTINUED
Installation of accessories Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing a citizen band radio or other transmitting device in your vehicle. Such devices may cause the electronic control system to malfunction if they are incorrectly in- stalled or if they are not suited for the vehicle.
Audio set Your SUBARU may be equipped with one of the fol- lowing audio sets. See the pages indicated in this sec- tion for operating details.
Type A audio set
Radio operation: refer to page 5-5 Compact disc player operation: refer to page 5-10 CD changer control: refer to page 5-13
HS5009AA
5-4
Audio
Type B audio set
Radio operation: refer to page 5-16 Built-in CD changer operation: refer to page 5-22
In-dash 6 CD auto changer (Optional audio unit if equipped)
Inserting and removing a disc or all discs: refer to page 5-27
US5020AA
HG5021AA
5-5
Audio
CONTINUED
Type A audio set (if equipped) The radio will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
Radio operation
(1) (2)
(3)(4)(5)(6)
HS5012BB
(1) Power switch, Volume control, Tone/Fader/Balance control dial
(2) BAND button (3) Tuning buttons (4) Preset buttons (5) AUDIO button (6) SCAN button
5-6
Audio
Power switch and volume/bass/treble/fader/ balance control (PWR/VOL)
The dial (1) is used for both power (ON/OFF) and vol- ume control. The radio is turned ON and OFF by push- ing the dial and the volume is controlled by turning the dial.
Tone and balance control The VOLUME control knob normally function as vol- ume control. This knob become a control for Treble, Bass, Fader or Balance when you select the appropri- ate audio mode. Choose desired volume level for each mode by turning the VOLUME control knob. The control function re- turns to volume control mode after about 5 seconds. To change control modes: Each brief press of the AUDIO button changes control modes in the follow- ing sequence starting from volume control mode. (When the radio is first turned on, the control mode is in the volume control.)
Volume (VOL)
Bass (BAS)
Treble (TRE)
Balance (BAL)
Fader (FAD)
5-7
Audio
CONTINUED
Display Control mode
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
VOL Volume control For less volume For more volume
BAS Bass control For less bass sound For more bass sound
TRE Treble control For less treble sound For more treble sound
BAL Balance control To increase left speaker volume and decrease right speaker volume
To increase right speaker volume and decrease left speaker volume
FAD Fader control To increase rear speaker volume and decrease front speaker volume
To increase front speaker volume and decrease rear speaker volume
HS5014BA
5-8
Audio
FM/AM/Weather band selection button (BAND) Push the BAND button when the radio is on to select FM1, FM2, AM or Weather band (WB) reception. Each time this button is pressed, the band will change in the following order:
The display indicates which one is currently selected.
Stereo indicator The stereo indicator ST will come on when an FM stereo broadcast is received.
Tuning (TUNE) Manual tuning (TUNE)
Push the side of the tuning button (3) to in- crease the tuning frequency and press the side of the button to decrease it. Each time the button is pressed, the frequency chang- es 10 KHz in the AM waveband and 0.2 MHz in the FM waveband.
Manual tuning for weather band When weather band mode is selected, press the
side of the tuning button (3) to change the WB channel up and press the side of the tuning but- ton to change the WB channel down. Each time the button is pressed, the WB channel changes to the next channel.
Seek tuning If the tuning button (3) is pressed for longer than half of a second, the radio will begin to automatically search for receivable frequencies and will stop at the first one found. This function may not be available, however, when radio signals are weak. In such a situ- ation, perform manual tuning to select the desired sta- tion.
Automatic tuning (SCAN) Press the SCAN button (6) to change the radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the radio scans through the radio band until a station is found. The radio will stop at the station for five seconds while displaying the fre- quency, after which scanning will continue until the en- tire band has been scanned from the low end to the high end. Press the SCAN button again to cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any displayed frequency. When the SCAN button is pressed for automatic tun- ing, stations are scanned in the direction of low fre- quencies to high frequencies only.
FM1 FM2 AM
WB
5-9
Audio
CONTINUED
Automatic tuning may not function properly if the sta- tion reception is weakened by distance from the sta- tion or proximity to tall buildings and hills.
Selecting preset stations Presetting a station with a preset button (4) allows you to select that station in a single operation. Up to six WB, AM, FM1 and FM2 stations each may be preset.
How to preset stations 1. Press the BAND selection button to select AM, FM1, FM2 or WB reception. 2. Press the SCAN button (6) or tune the radio man- ually until the desired station frequency is displayed. 3. Press one of the preset buttons (4) for at least 2 seconds to store the frequency. At this time, there will momentarily be no sound from the radio. If the button is pressed for less than 2 seconds, the preceding se- lection will remain in memory.
NOTE If the connection between the radio and battery
is broken for any reason such as vehicle mainte- nance or radio removal, all stations stored in the preset buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is nec- essary to reset the preset buttons.
If a cell phone is placed near the radio, it may cause the radio to emit noise when it receives
calls. This noise does not indicate a radio fault.
5-10
Audio
Compact disc player operation
(15) (7) (8) (9)
(10)(11)(12)(13)(14)
HS5012CB
(7) Disc slot (8) CD button (9) Eject button (10) Fast-forwarding and track up
button (11) Fast-reversing and track down
button (12) Random button (13) Repeat button (14) Scan button (15) PWR (power) switch
5-11
Audio
CONTINUED
To play back a compact disc When CD is not in the player
Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole while grip- ping the edge of the disc, then insert it in to the slot (with the label side up) and the player will automatical- ly pull the disc into position. A single CD (8 cm/3 inch CD) may also be used with- out any adapter.
NOTE Make sure to always insert a disc with the label
side up. If a disc is inserted with the label side down, it might be ejected or the player might shut off.
After the last song finishes, the player will auto- matically return to track 1 (the first song on the disc).
When CD is in the player Press the CD button (8). The display will show CD and the player will start playback.
NOTE After the last song finishes, playback will automat- ically return to track 1 (the first song on the disc).
To stop playback of a CD When the PWR button (15) is pressed during play-
back of a CD, the CD stops playing temporarily. To let the CD resume playing, press the button again.
To select a song from its beginning Forward direction
Briefly press the side of the button (10) to skip to the beginning of the next track. Each time this side of the button is pressed, the indicated track number will increase.
Backward direction Briefly press the side of the button (11) to skip to the beginning of the current track. Each time this side of the button is pressed, the indicated track num- ber will decrease.
Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing Fast-forwarding
Press the side of the button (10) continuously for more than 1 second to fast-forward the disc. Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.
Fast-reversing Press the side of the button (11) continuously for more than 1 second to fast-reverse the disc. Release the button to stop fast-reversing.
5-12
Audio
Repeat playback Press the RPT button (13) and release it in less than 2 seconds while a song is playing to play the song re- peatedly. The RPT indicator will come on and the song will be played continuously. To cancel the repeat mode, press the button again. Then the RPT indica- tor goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.
Random playback Press the RAND button (12) and hold it in for more than 2 seconds while a disc is being played back to play all songs on the disc in a random order. The RAND indicator will come on and all songs on the disc will be played in a random order. To cancel the random mode, press the button again. Then the RAND indicator goes out, and normal play- back mode is restored.
Scan Press the SCAN button (14) and release it in less than 2 seconds, and you can hear the first 10 seconds of each track to search for the desired program. To continue listening to the program, press the SCAN button again. After all tracks on the disc has been scanned, normal playback mode is restored.
To eject a disc from the player When a disc is being played back or when a disc is in
the player, press the eject button (9). The disc will be ejected. The disc may be removed even when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position.
NOTE Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out,
because vibration might make it fall out. To protect the disc, the disc is automatically
loaded if it is left in the ejected position for more than approximately 15 seconds (Auto Reload). In this case, the disc is not played.
5-13
Audio
CONTINUED
CD changer control (if optional in-dash CD changer is connected)
An optional CD changer can be connected to this audio unit. Consult the instructions that accompany the CD changer for operating the CD changer itself (e.g., how to load or unload CDs). See your SUBARU dealer for more information.
(16)
(17)(18)(19)(20)
HS5012DB
(16) CD button (17) Track selection buttons (18) RAND (Random) button (19) RPT (Repeat) button (20) SCAN button
5-14
Audio
To start playback When the CD button (16) is pressed, the CD changer will start playback. The display shows the current disc number, track number and the elapsed time during playback.
NOTE If a disc is in the player, the DISC button is
used to change from CD player operation to DISC changer operation. Each time the DISC button is pressed, the operating mode will change alter- nately.
At the end of the disc, the player automatically continues with the next disc.
After playback on the last disc finishes, play- back will automatically return to the first disc.
If you have loaded fewer than 6 discs, any miss- ing disc is automatically skipped.
Selection of a desired disc You can select a desired disc from among the discs contained in the CD changer only by pressing the cor- responding number on one of the disc select buttons. If you are to listen to the 5th disc in the CD changer, press the 5 button of the disc select buttons. All other discs in the CD changer can also be selected in a sim- ilar way.
NOTE No disc change takes place if the button corre-
sponding to the storage tray in which no disc is loaded is pressed.
If the disc select button corresponding to the disc now in playback is pressed again, the disc will be replayed from its beginning.
To select a song from its beginning
Forward direction Briefly press the side of the button (17) to skip to the beginning of the next track. Each time this side of the button is pressed, the indicated track number will increase.
Backward direction Briefly press the side of the button (17) to skip to the beginning of the current track. Each time this side of the button is pressed, the indicated track num- ber will decrease.
Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing Fast-forwarding
Press the side of the button (17) continuously for more than 1 second to fast-forward the disc. Release the button to stop fast-forwarding. If you continue fast-forwarding to the end of the disc,
5-15
Audio
CONTINUED
the CD changer will automatically stop fast-forwarding and start playback beginning with the first track on the current disc.
Fast-reversing Press the side of the button (17) continuously for more than 1 second to fast-reverse the disc. Release the button to stop fast-reversing. If you continue fast-reversing to the beginning of the disc, the CD changer will automatically stop fast-re- versing and start playback beginning with the first track on the current disc.
Repeat playback Press the RPT button (19) while a song is playing to play the song repeatedly. The RPT indicator will come on and the song will be played continuously. To cancel the repeat mode, press the button again. Then the RPT indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.
Random playback Press the RAND button (18) while a disc is being played back to play all songs on the disc in a random order. The RAND indicator will come on and all songs on the disc will be played in a random order. To cancel the random mode, press the button again. Then the RAND indicator goes out, and normal play-
back mode is restored.
Scan (a convenient way to become familiar with a disc)
1. Press the SCAN button (20). The display shows SCAN and the track number being scanned. You hear the first 10 seconds of each track. The operation is automatically cleared after play- ing all programs. Then, normal playback starts.
2. Press the SCAN button again when you hear a track you like.
Normal playback resumes.
To stop playback To stop playback and switch over to the radio mode, press the BAND button.
5-16
Audio
Type B audio set (if equipped) The radio will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
Radio operation
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(7)(8) US5021BB
(1) SCAN button (2) FM/AM selection button (3) WB (weather band) button (4) Power switch, Volume control,
Bass/Midrange/Treble control and Fader/Balance control dial
(5) TONE button (6) Fader/Balance selection button (7) Preset buttons (8) Tuning buttons
5-17
Audio
CONTINUED
Power switch and volume/bass/treble/fader/ balance control (PWR/VOL)
The dial (4) is used for both power (ON/OFF) and vol- ume control. The radio is turned ON and OFF by push- ing the dial and the volume is controlled by turning the dial.
This dial is used for bass/midrange/treble controls when the TONE button (5) is in the depressed posi- tion. It is also used for fader/balance controls when the BAL button (6) is in the depressed position.
5-18
Audio
Display Control mode
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
BASS Bass control For less bass sound For more bass sound
MIDDLE Midrange control For less midrange sound For more midrange sound
TREBLE Treble control For less treble sound For more treble sound
FADER Fader control To increase rear speaker volume and decrease front speaker volume
To increase front speaker volume and decrease rear speaker volume
BALANCE Balance control To increase left speaker volume and decrease right speaker volume
To increase right speaker volume and decrease left speaker volume
VOLUME Volume control For less volume For more volume
HS5014BA
5-19
Audio
CONTINUED
Tone control The volume control dial (4) normally function as vol- ume control. The dial become a control for Bass, Midrange or Treble when you select the appropriate tone control mode. Choose desired volume level for each mode by turning the volume control dial. The control function returns to volume control mode after about 5 seconds.
To change control modes: Each brief press of the TONE button (5) changes control modes in the fol- lowing sequence starting from bass control mode. (When the radio is first turned on, the control mode is in the volume control.)
Fader and balance control The volume control dial (4) normally function as vol- ume control. The dial become the controls for Fader or Balance when you select the appropriate fader and balance control mode. Choose desired setting for each mode by turning the volume control dial. The control function returns to vol- ume control mode after about 5 seconds.
To change control modes: Each brief press of the
BAL button (6) changes control modes in the follow- ing sequence starting from fader control mode. (When the radio is turned on, the control mode is in the vol- ume control.)
Display illumination dimness cancellation (BRIGHT)
The brightness of the radio display dims when the light switch is in the or positions. If this makes the display difficult to read, press the volume dial for more than 1.5 seconds to return the display to original brightness. Subsequently pressing the volume dial again for more than 1.5 seconds or if you can safely do so, turning the light switch to the OFF position and back to the or position makes the radio display dim again.
FM/AM selection button (FM/AM) Push the FM/AM button (2) when the radio is off to turn on the radio. Push the FM/AM button when the radio is on to se- lect FM1, FM2 or AM reception. Each time this button is pressed, the band will change in the following order:
VOLUMEBASS TREBLEMIDDLE
FADER BALANCE VOLUME
5-20
Audio
The display indicates which one is currently selected.
Stereo indicator The stereo indicator ST will come on when an FM stereo broadcast is received.
Weather band button (WB) Push the WB button (3) when the radio is off to turn on the radio in the weather band. Press the WB button when the radio is on to select the weather band.
Manual tuning (TUNE)
Manual tuning for AM and FM waveband Push the side of the tuning button (8) to increase the tuning frequency and press the side of the button to decrease it. Each time the button is pressed, the frequency chang- es 10 KHz in the AM waveband and 0.2 MHz in the FM waveband.
Manual tuning for weather band When weather band mode is selected, press the
side of the tuning button (8) to change the WB channel up and press the side of the button to change the WB channel down. Each time the button is pressed, the WB channel changes to the next channel.
Seek tuning If the tuning button (8) is pressed for longer than half of a second, the radio will begin to automatically search for receivable frequencies and will stop at the first one found. This function may not be available, however, when radio signals are weak. In such a situ- ation, perform manual tuning to select the desired sta- tion.
Automatic tuning (SCAN) Press the SCAN button (1) to change the radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the radio scans through the radio band until a station is found. The radio will stop at the station for five seconds while displaying the fre- quency, after which scanning will continue until the en- tire band has been scanned from the low end to the high end. Press the SCAN button again to cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any displayed frequency. When the SCAN button is pressed for automatic tun- ing, stations are scanned in the direction of low fre- quencies to high frequencies only. Automatic tuning may not function properly if the sta-
FM1 FM2 AM
5-21
Audio
CONTINUED
tion reception is weakened by distance from the sta- tion or proximity to tall buildings and hills.
Selecting preset stations Presetting a station with a preset button (7) allows you to select that station in a single operation. Up to six AM, FM1, FM2 and WB stations each may be preset.
How to preset stations 1. Press the FM/AM selection button to select AM, FM1 or FM2 reception.
OR Press the WB button (3) to select the weather band.
2. Press the SCAN button (1) or tune the radio man- ually until the desired station frequency is displayed. 3. Press one of the preset buttons (7) for at least 1.5 seconds to store the frequency. The frequency of the station will flash once on the display at this time. If the button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds, the pre- ceding selection will remain in memory.
NOTE If the connection between the radio and battery
is broken for any reason such as vehicle mainte- nance or radio removal, all stations stored in the preset buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is nec- essary to reset the preset buttons.
If a cell phone is placed near the radio, it may cause the radio to emit noise when it receives calls. This noise does not indicate a radio fault.
5-22
Audio
Built-in CD changer operation
(10)(9) (11) (12) (14)(13) (15) (16)
(17)(18) US5021CB
(9) Eject button (10) SCAN button (11) CD (CD player selection) button (12) Disc slot (13) DISC indicator (14) Repeat button (15) Random button (16) LOAD button (17) Disc select buttons (18) Track selection buttons
5-23
Audio
CONTINUED
NOTE Make sure to always insert a disc with the label
side up. If a disc is inserted with the label side down, it might be ejected or the player might shut off.
Single CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are not sup- ported, and if inserted, they will be immediately ejected.
If a disc is inserted during a radio broadcast, the disc will interrupt the broadcast.
How to insert a CD(s)
Inserting a CD 1. Press LOAD button (16). If the magazine in the player has an idle position where you can insert a disc, the DISC indicator (13) associated with the idle posi- tion will blink. If no indicator blinks, it means that there is no idle po- sition in the magazine. 2. As soon as the DISC indicator (13) begins to blink, the LOAD will appear on display for a period of 15 seconds. Insert a disc during the period. The disc will be then automatically drawn in, and the player will begin to play back the first track of the disc.
To insert more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine will be loaded with discs in the
ascending order of position number. If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds after you have pressed the LOAD button, the player will begin to play back the first track of the last disc you have in- serted.
The disc indicator steadily lights up if a disc is al- ready inserted in the corresponding position of the magazine.
While the player is in the loading mode, if you press the FM/AM selection button (2), the player will enter the standby mode. Press the CD button (11) to start playback.
Inserting a disc in a desired position 1. Press the LOAD button (16). If the magazine in the player has an idle position where you can insert a disc, the DISC indicator (13) associated with the idle position will blink. The positions in the magazine the indicator of which steadily lights up are already loaded with discs. 2. Press the disc select button (17) at the position where you want to insert a disc. The associated DISC indicator will blink, and the LOAD will be dis- played. 3. If you insert a disc during the 15-second period while the LOAD is on display, the disc will be auto- matically drawn in, and the player will start playback of the disc, beginning with the first track.
5-24
Audio
To insert more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1 and 2.
While the player is in the loading mode, if you press the FM/AM selection button (2), the player will enter standby mode. Press the CD button (11) to start playback.
Loading all the magazine (Full disc loading mode)
1. If you continue to press the LOAD button (16) for more than 1.5 seconds, the player will produce beep sound and will enter the full disc loading mode. 2. A DISC indicator (13) will blink, and the ALL LOAD will be on display for a period of 15 seconds. If a disc is successfully loaded during this period, the DISC indicator will stop blinking and will steadily light. 3. When the loading of a disc is complete, the next DISC indicator will blink. Then repeat Step 2. 4. When the magazine is filled with discs by repeating Steps 2 and 3, the player will start playback of the discs, beginning with the one inserted first. If you fail to insert any disc during each 15 seconds in- terval, the full disc loading mode will be canceled, and the player will start playback of the disc inserted first.
How to play back a CD or make a pause
When there is no CD inserted: Insert a CD by referring to How to insert a CD(s). When a CD is loaded, the player will start playback of the CD, beginning with the first track.
When there are CDs loaded: Press a desired one of the disc select buttons (17) the DISC indicator (13) of which steadily lights up. The player will then start playback of the selected CD, be- ginning with the first track.
To select a song from its beginning Forward direction
Briefly press the side of the button (18) to skip to the beginning of the next track. Each time the button is pressed, the indicated track number will increase.
Backward direction Briefly press the side of the button (18) to skip to the beginning of the current track. Each time the but- ton is pressed, the indicated track number will de- crease.
5-25
Audio
CONTINUED
Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing Fast-forwarding
Press the side of the button (18) continuously for more than 0.5 second to fast-forward the disc. Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.
Fast-reversing Press the side of the button (18) continuously for more than 0.5 second to fast-reverse the disc. Release the button to stop fast-reversing.
Repeat playback Press the RPT button (14) while a song is playing to play the song repeatedly. The RPT indicator will come on and the song will be played continuously. To cancel the repeat mode, press the button again. Then the RPT indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.
Random playback Press the RDM button (15) while a disc is being played back to play all songs on the disc in a random order. The RDM indicator will come on and all songs on the disc will be played in a random order. To cancel the random mode, press the button again. Then the RDM indicator goes out, and normal play- back mode is restored.
Scan When the SCAN button (10) is pressed while the disc is being played back, you can hear the first 10 seconds of each track to search for the desired program. To continue listening to the program, press the SCAN button again. After all tracks on the disc have been scanned, normal playback mode is restored.
How to unload CDs from the player
Ejecting a CD from the player Of the discs loaded, you can select and remove only one disc. 1. Press the disc select button (17) of the disc whose DISC indicator (13) is ON. 2. Press the eject button (9). Then the DISC indica- tor associated with the disc you have selected will blink, and the disc will be ejected. To remove more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1 and 2. If you press the eject button after turning OFF the igni- tion switch, only one disc will be ejected.
Ejecting all discs from the player (All disc ejec- tion mode)
1. If you continue to press the eject button (9), the player will produce beep sound and will enter the all disc ejection mode.
5-26
Audio
2. Remove the disc that has been ejected. The other discs loaded will then be ejected one after another. If you do not remove the ejected disc within 15 seconds, the All disc ejection mode will be canceled.
NOTE Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out, because vibration might make it fall out.
Do not attempt to insert two or more discs into the slot at a time. Doing so can cause mechan- ical damage to the CD changer.
5-27
Audio
CONTINUED
In-dash 6 CD auto changer (if equipped)
Loading and unloading compact discs
(5) (1) (2)
(4) (3)
HG5022BB
(1) Disc slot (2) Disc indicators (disc No.1 to 6) (3) Disc select buttons (disc No.1 to
6) (4) Eject button (5) Disc slot indicator
5-28
Audio
Do not attempt to insert two or more discs into the slot at a time. Doing so can cause me- chanical damage to the CD changer.
Use only music CDs identified by a mark.
Do not use CDs listed below which could cause damage to the CD player.
3 inch (8 cm) compact disc. Any disc with a peel-off or seal on it. Any disc with scratches and/or dust. Bent disc. Cleaning disc. CD accessory. (E.g., 3 inch (8 cm) disc
adapter) Do not insert or remove any disc when the
automatic transmission selector lever is in the park position; the selector lever in that position can interfere with disc insertion or removal, causing scratches on the disc surface (for AT vehicles).
To insert a disc 1. Press one of the disc select buttons (3) (numbered from 1 to 6) for which the disc indicator light (2) is
OFF. The disc indicator lights are located directly above the corresponding disc select buttons. 2. The indicator will begin blinking. The blinking will last for 15 seconds. During this period, insert a desired disc, and the disc will begin to play. (If any disc is not inserted during this period, the Disc slot (1) door will close. Repeat Step 1.) Be sure to hold a disc with the label side (the side where titles are printed) up. 3. To insert another disc, repeat Steps 1 and 2 choos- ing a different disc select button.
To insert six discs at a time 1. Press and hold the disc select button number 1 un- til all disc indicators begin blinking (about 1.5 sec- onds). 2. The indicators will blink for 15 seconds. During this period, insert desired six discs. 3. When all discs are loaded, the first disc will begin to play. (If no disc is inserted within this 15 seconds, the entire disc load sequence will be canceled.)
To remove a disc 1. Press the desired one of the disc select buttons (3) (numbered from 1 to 6) for which the disc indicator light is on.
5-29
Audio
CONTINUED
2. Press the eject button (4). The selected disc will be ejected and the indicator light will begin blinking. 3. To remove another disc, repeat Steps 1 and 2 choosing a different Disc select button. (To remove discs when the ignition switch is in the Lock position, press the eject button, and the first disc will be ejected. Press the eject button again, and the next disc will be ejected and so on. At this time, the disc select buttons are disabled.)
To remove all discs at one time 1. Press and hold the eject button (4) until all Disc in- dicators begin blinking (about 1.5 seconds), and the first disc will be ejected. 2. When the disc is removed, the next one will be ejected, and so on.
To replace a playing disc with another Simply press the desired one of disc select buttons (3) (numbered from 1 to 6) or press the disc select button on the radio unit to select the desired disc, and the disc will begin to play.
Disc indicators Lit: when the corresponding storage tray is occupied by a disc. Blinking: Disc player is either in loading, eject or changing mode.
OFF: No disc is loaded or the ignition switch is in the LOCK position.
Open/Closed disc slot indicator When the disc slot is open, the disc indicators on both sides of the slot illuminate.
Function control Refer to CD changer control operating instructions de- scribed in the Type A audio set (if equipped) section.
5-30
Audio
Precautions to observe when han- dling a compact disc Use only compact discs (CDs) that have the mark shown below.
You may also use compact discs (CD-Rs and CD- RWs) that have the following marks, but you may not use some discs if they were produced using writing methods not compatible with your vehicles audio sys- tem.
In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can form inside the CD player, preventing normal operation. If this happens, eject the CD and wait for the player to dry out.
Skipping may occur when the CD player is subject- ed to severe vibration (for example, when the vehicle is driven on a rough surface).
To remove a disc from the case, press the center of the case and hold both edges of the disc. If the disc
HS5017AA UG5040AA
5-31
Audio
CONTINUED
surface is touched directly, contamination could cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the disc surface.
Use a clean disc whenever possible. If there are de- posits, wipe the disc surface from the center outward with a dry, soft cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth, thinner, benzene, alcohol, etc.
Do not use any disc that is scratched, deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use any disc that has a non-stan- dard shape (for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions or problems might result.
A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never keep it either in places exposed to direct sunlight, near heaters or in vehicles parked in the sun or hot days.
HS5018BA
6-1
6
Interior equipment
Interior lights ................................................ 6-2 Dome light ......................................................... 6-2 Cargo area light ................................................ 6-2
Map lights ...................................................... 6-3 Sun visors ..................................................... 6-3
Vanity mirror ...................................................... 6-4 Storage compartments ................................ 6-4
Glove box ........................................................... 6-5 Center console .................................................. 6-5 Overhead console ............................................. 6-6 Dashboard storage compartment ................... 6-6 Convenience net ............................................... 6-7 Coin tray ............................................................ 6-7
Cup holders .................................................. 6-8 Front passengers cup holder ......................... 6-8 Rear passengers cup holder ........................... 6-8
Accessory power outlets ............................. 6-9 Cigarette lighter socket ................................ 6-11
Use with a cigarette lighter .............................. 6-12 Using as an accessory power outlet ............... 6-13
Ashtray .......................................................... 6-14 Floor mat ....................................................... 6-15 Coat hook ...................................................... 6-16 Cargo area cover (if equipped) .................... 6-16
Using the cover ................................................. 6-16 To remove the cover ......................................... 6-17 To install the cover housing ............................ 6-17
Shopping bag hook ...................................... 6-18 Cargo tie-down hooks .................................. 6-18
Under-floor storage compartment ............... 6-19
6-2
Interior equipment
Interior equipmentInterior lights When leaving your vehicle, make sure the light goes out to avoid battery discharge.
Dome light
The dome light switch has three positions:
ON: The light stays on continuously. DOOR (middle position): The dome light comes on when any of the doors or the rear gate is opened. The light remains on for several seconds and gradually goes out after all doors and the rear gate are closed or if the key is inserted in the ignition switch.
The light also can be turned on by use of the keyless entry transmitter. See the Remote keyless entry sys- tem (if equipped) in chapter 2 for detailed information. OFF: The light stays off.
Cargo area light
The cargo area light switch has three positions:
ON: The light stays on continuously. OFF: The light stays off. DOOR: The light comes on only when the rear gate is opened.
ON
DOOR
OFF
HS6025BB
ON
OFF
DOOR
HS6026BB
6-3
Interior equipment
CONTINUED
Map lights
To turn on the map light, push the switch. To turn it off, push the switch again.
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the light is turned off to avoid battery discharge.
Sun visors
To block out glare, swing down the visors. To use the sun visor at a side window, swing it down and move it sideways.
HS6027BA HS6028BA
6-4
Interior equipment
Vanity mirror
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
Storage compartments
Always keep the storage compartment closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden stops or an accident.
Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the storage compartment.
HS6029BA
6-5
Interior equipment
CONTINUED
Glove box
A) Lock B) Unlock
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To close it, push the lid firmly upward.
To lock the glove box, insert the key and turn it clock- wise.
Center console
To open the lid, pull up the lock release. If the console lid is fully opened when a large cup is put in the rear passengers cup holder, the lid may hit the cup and beverage may be spilled.
A
B
HS6030BC HS6031BA
6-6
Interior equipment
Overhead console
To open the console, push on the console lid lightly and the lid will automatically open.
When your vehicle is in the sun or a warm day, the inside of the overhead console heats up. Avoid storing plastic or other heat-vulnerable or flammable articles such as a lighter in the overhead console.
Dashboard storage compartment
To open the dashboard compartment, push the button on the lid and the lid will automatically open. Be sure to close the compartment fully before driving.
HS6052BA HS6053BA
6-7
Interior equipment
CONTINUED
Convenience net
A net for storing small articles is provided at the front passengers foot-well.
Coin tray
To open the coin tray, pull the upper edge of the lid.
HS6054AA HS6055BA
6-8
Interior equipment
Cup holders
Front passengers cup holder
A dual cup holder is built in the center console, beside the parking brake lever.
Rear passengers cup holder
A dual cup holder is located at the back of the center console. To use the cup holder, open the lid by pulling its upper edge.
Do not pick up a cup from the cup holder or put a cup in the holder while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead to an accident.
Take care to avoid spills. Beverages, if hot, might burn you or your passengers. Spilled beverages may also damage upholstery or car-
HS6032BA
HS6033BA
6-9
Interior equipment
CONTINUED
pets. Accessory power outlets
HS6056BA
6-10
Interior equipment
Accessory power outlets are provided in the center console and in the cargo area. Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery is available at the socket when the ignition switch is either in the ACC or ON position. You can use an in-car use electrical appliance by con- necting it to the socket. When both outlets are used at the same time, the total power consumption of the electric appliances must be 120W or less.
Do not attempt to use a cigarette lighter in the
accessory power outlet. Do not place any foreign objects, especially
metal ones such as coins or aluminum foil, into the accessory power outlet. That could cause a short circuit. Always put the cap on the acces- sory power outlet when it is not in use.
Use only electrical appliances which are de- signed for 12V DC and which consume less than 120W. Overloading the accessory power outlet can cause a short circuit. Do not use dou- ble adapters or more than one electrical appli- ance.
If the plug on your electric appliance is either too loose or too tight for the accessory power outlet, this can result in a poor contact or cause the plug to get stuck. Only use plugs that fit properly.
Use of an electric appliance in the accessory power outlet for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery dis- charge.
Before driving your vehicle, make sure that the plug and the cord on your electrical appli- ance will not interfere with your shifting gears and operating the accelerator and brake pedals. If they do, do not use the electrical appliance
HS6034BA
6-11
Interior equipment
CONTINUED
while driving.
NOTE When the lid of the center console is closed, a gap remains between the center console and the lid to allow the power outlet in the center console to be used. Pass the electrical appliances cord through this gap.
Cigarette lighter socket
A cigarette lighter socket can be found behind the ash- tray lid under the climate controls. Push gently on the lid to open it. A cigarette lighter plug is an optional ac- cessory. It is available from your SUBARU dealer. The cigarette lighter socket may also be used as a power source for an in-car use electrical appliance.
The electrical power socket located on the lower part of the instrument panel is originally designed to use a genuine SUBARU cigarette
HS6035BA
6-12
Interior equipment
lighter plug. Do not use non-genuine cigarette lighter plugs in the socket. Doing so may cause a short-circuit and overheating, resulting in a fire.
If the socket is ever used for a plug-in acces- sory such as a cell phone, that may damage the portion of the sockets internal mechanism that causes a cigarette lighter plug to pop out af- ter its lighter element is heated. Therefore, do not place a cigarette lighter plug in a socket that has been used, even once, to power a plug- in accessory. Doing so may cause the plug to stick and overheat, creating a potential fire haz- ard.
Do not place any foreign objects, especially metal ones such as coins or aluminum foil, into the socket. That could cause a short circuit.
Use with a cigarette lighter
The cigarette lighter operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON and ACC positions. To use the cigarette lighter, push in the knob and wait a few moments. It will automatically spring up when ready for use.
To avoid being burned, never grasp the lighter by the end with the heating element. Doing so could result in injury and could also damage the heating element.
UG6025BA
6-13
Interior equipment
CONTINUED
Do not hold the lighter pushed in, because it will overheat.
Using as an accessory power outlet Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery is available at the socket when the ignition switch is either in the ACC or ON position. If you use the socket as an accessory power outlet, take the following precautions. When the socket is not in use, always put the cap on the socket to prevent any foreign object from entering it.
Use only in-car use electrical appliances which are designed for 12V DC and which con- sume less than 120W. Overloading the socket can cause a short circuit. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical appliance.
If the plug on your electric appliance is either too loose or too tight for the socket, this can re- sult in a poor contact or cause the plug to get stuck. Only use plugs that fit properly.
Use of an electric appliance in the socket for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge.
Before driving your vehicle, make sure that the plug and the cord on your electrical appli- ance will not interfere with your shifting gears and operating the accelerator and brake pedals. If they do, do not use the electrical appliance while driving.
If the socket has been used for electrical appliances, damage may have been done to the internal mecha- nism that causes a cigarette lighter to pop out after its element has been heated. For that reason, a ciga- rette lighter, even if it is a genuine part, should not be used in the socket. If you want to use the socket for a cigarette lighter again, or to protect your purchaser be- fore you sell your vehicle, have your SUBARU dealer replace the socket with a new one.
6-14
Interior equipment
Ashtray
To open the ashtray, push lightly on the lid below the climate controls. Fully close the lid after using it to help reduce residual smoke. To remove the ashtray for cleaning, hold the right and left sides of the ashtray and pull it out.
NOTE
Particles of ash and tobacco will accumulate around the hinges of the ashtrays inner lid. Clean them off using a toothbrush or other narrow-end- ed implement.
Do not use ashtrays as waste receptacles or leave a lighted cigarette in an ashtray. This could cause a fire.
HS6037BA
US6060BA
6-15
Interior equipment
CONTINUED
Floor mat
A retaining pin is located on the drivers side of the ve- hicle next to the fuel filler door release. The floor mat is secured using the built-in grommet, by placing the grommet over the pin and pushing down- ward.
Make sure the drivers floor mat is placed back in its proper location and correctly secured on its retaining pin. If the floor mat slips forward and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving, it could cause an accident.
US6062BA
HS6039BA
6-16
Interior equipment
Coat hook
The coat hook is attached to the rear left passengers hand grip.
Never hang anything on the coat hook that might obstruct the drivers view or that could cause injury in sudden stops or in a collision. And do not hang items on the coat hook that weigh 2.2 lbs (1 kg) or more.
Cargo area cover (if equipped) The cargo area cover is provided for covering the car- go area and to protect its contents from direct sunlight. This cover is detachable to make room for additional cargo.
Using the cover
To extend the cover, pull the end of the cover out of the housing, then insert its hooks into the catches as shown. To rewind it, unhook it from the catches and it will rewind automatically. You should hold on to the cover and guide it back into the cover housing while it
US6061BA
HS6042BA
6-17
Interior equipment
CONTINUED
is rewinding.
Do not place anything on the extended cover. Putting excessive weight on the extended cov- er can break it and an object on the cover could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or collision. This could cause serious injury.
To remove the cover
1. Rewind the cover.
2. Take it off the retainer, lift it out. 3. Store the cover housing in the cargo area.
To install the cover housing To install the cover, insert both ends of the cover hous- ing into the retainers.
HS6043BA
6-18
Interior equipment
Shopping bag hook
A shopping bag hook is attached to each side of the cargo area. To use the hook, pull the lower portion out.
Do not hang items on the shopping bag hook that weigh 2.2 lbs (1 kg) or more.
Cargo tie-down hooks
The cargo area is equipped with four tie-down hooks so that cargo can be secured with a cargo net or ropes. When using the hooks, raise them. When not in use, lower the hooks.
The cargo tie-down hooks are designed only for securing light cargo. Never try to secure cargo that exceeds the capacity of the hooks. The maximum load capacity is 44 lbs (20 kg) per a
HS6046BA HS6047BA
6-19
Interior equipment
CONTINUED
hook. Under-floor storage compartment
There are four storage trays underneath the floor of the cargo area. They can be used to store small items.
Always keep the lids closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden stop or an accident.
Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the storage compartment.
HS6048BA
6-20
Interior equipment
Front, left and right side storage compartment
To open the lid, raise the cargo tie-down hooks and pull the tab up. The jack and jack handle are stored in the left side storage compartment.
HS6049BA
6-21
Interior equipment
CONTINUED
Center storage compartment (Storage bucket)
To open the lid, pull the handle up. To keep the lid open, hang the hook provided on the backside of the lid on the rear edge of the roof. The storage bucket is put on the spare wheel.
HS6050BA
HS6051BA
7-1
7
Starting and operating
Fuel ................................................................ 7-2 Fuel requirements ............................................. 7-2 Fuel filler lid and cap ........................................ 7-4
State emission testing (U.S. only) ............... 7-7 Preparing to drive ......................................... 7-9 Starting the engine ....................................... 7-9
Manual transmission vehicle ........................... 7-9 Automatic transmission vehicle ...................... 7-10
Stopping the engine ..................................... 7-12 Manual transmission .................................... 7-12
Shifting speeds ................................................. 7-13 Driving tips ........................................................ 7-14
Automatic transmission ............................... 7-15 Selector lever for automatic transmission ..... 7-16 Shift lock release .............................................. 7-20
Rear viscous limited slip differential (LSD) (if equipped) .................................... 7-21
Power steering .............................................. 7-21 Braking .......................................................... 7-22
Braking tips ....................................................... 7-22 Brake system ..................................................... 7-22 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........ 7-23
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .................... 7-23 ABS system self-check .................................... 7-24 ABS warning light ............................................. 7-24
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system (if equipped) ...................... 7-26 Steps to take if EBD system fails .................... 7-26
Vehicle Dynamics Control system (if equipped) ............................................... 7-28 Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor .... 7-30 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch ........... 7-33
Parking your vehicle ..................................... 7-34 Parking brake .................................................... 7-34 Parking tips ....................................................... 7-34
Hill holder (for manual transmission if equipped) ................................................ 7-36
Cruise control (if equipped) ......................... 7-38 To set cruise control ........................................ 7-38 To temporarily cancel the cruise control ....... 7-40 To turn off the cruise control ........................... 7-41 To change the cruising speed ......................... 7-41
Self-leveling rear suspension (if equipped) ............................................... 7-43
7-2
Starting and operating
Starting and operatingFuel
Use of a fuel which is low in quality or use of an inappropriate fuel additive may cause engine damage.
Fuel requirements Non-turbo models
The 2.5-liter engine is designed to operate using un- leaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher.
Turbo models The 2.5-liter turbo engine is designed to operate using premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI or higher. If premium unleaded gasoline is not available, regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher may be temporarily used. For optimum engine performance and driveability, it is required that you use premium grade unleaded gaso- line.
Fuel octane rating This octane rating is the average of the Research Oc- tane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly re- ferred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI). Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating can cause persistent and heavy knocking, which can damage the engine. Do not be concerned if your vehicle some- times knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when you accelerate. See your dealer or a qualified service technician if you use a fuel with the specified octane rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.
Unleaded gasoline The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler nozzle. Under no cir- cumstances should leaded gasoline be used because it will damage the emission control system and may impair driveability and fuel economy.
Gasoline for California-certified LEV Your vehicle was certified to Californias low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as indicated on the under- hood tune-up label. It is designed to optimize engine and emission performance with gasoline that meets the clean burning low-sulfur California gasoline speci- fications. If you live in any other state than California, your vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting Federal specifications. Gasoline sold outside California is per-
7-3
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
mitted to have higher sulfur levels, which may affect the performance of your vehicles catalytic converter and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or smell. SUBARU recommends that you try a different brand of unleaded gasoline having lower sulfur to determine if the problem is fuel related before returning your vehi- cle to an authorized dealer for service.
MMT Some gasoline contains an octane-enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tri- carbonyl). If you use such fuels, your emission control system performance may deteriorate and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this happens, return to your authorized SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.
Gasoline for cleaner air Your use of gasoline with detergent additives will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system. This helps keep your engine in tune and your emission control system working properly, and is a way of doing your part for cleaner air. If you continu- ously use a high quality fuel with the proper detergent and other additives, you should never need to add any fuel system cleaning agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with materials called oxygenates. Use of these fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your vehicle, but should con- tain no more than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the proper operation of your SUBARU.
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now produc- ing reformulated gasolines, which are designed to re- duce vehicle emissions. SUBARU approves the use of reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains, you should ask your service station operators if their gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates and if they have been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels suited for your vehicle as explained below.
Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that specified in this manual.
Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. Methanol can be used in your vehicle ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel mixture AND if it is accompanied by sufficient quantities of the proper cosolvents and corrosion in- hibitors required to prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT under
7-4
Starting and operating
these conditions. If undesirable driveability problems are experienced
and you suspect they may be fuel related, try a differ- ent brand of gasoline before seeking service at your SUBARU dealer.
Fuel system damage or driveability problems which result from the use of improper fuel are not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels containing alcohol may cause paint damage, which is not covered un- der the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
Fuel filler lid and cap Refueling
0
HS7005BA
7-5
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid release lever up.
A) Open B) Close
2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it slowly coun- terclockwise.
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. Before refueling, always first stop the engine and make sure that there are no lighted cigarettes, open flames or electrical sparks in the adjacent area.
When opening the cap, do not remove the cap quickly. Fuel may be under pressure and spray out of the fuel filler neck especially in hot
HS7006BA
A B
HS7007BC
7-6
Starting and operating
weather, which may cause injury.
3. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler pump auto- matically stops. Do not add any more fuel. 4. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain not to catch the tether un- der the cap while tightening. 5. Close the fuel filler lid completely. If you spill any fuel on the painted surface, rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the painted surface could be damaged.
NOTE If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks or if the tether is caught under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE warning light may come on. Refer to the Warning and indicator lights section located in chapter 3.
Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of a cleaning agent may cause damage to the fuel system.
Make sure that the cap is tightened until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels may cause paint damage, which is not covered under the SUBARU Limit- ed Warranty.
Always use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler cap. If you use the wrong cap, it may not fit or have proper venting, and your fuel tank and emis- sion control system might be damaged.
7-7
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
State emission testing (U.S. only) At state inspection time, remember to tell your in- spection or service station in advance not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dyna- mometer. Otherwise, serious transmission dam- age will result.
Some states have started using dynamometers in their state inspection programs in order to meet their obligation under federal law to implement stricter vehi- cle emission standards to reduce air pollution from cars. A dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like testing device that allows your vehicles wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in one place. Depending on the severity of a states air pollution problems, the states must adopt either a basic or enhanced vehicle emission inspection test. Normally, a portion of the ba- sic emission test consists of an emission inspector in- serting an analyzer probe into the exhaust pipe of an idling vehicle for a short period of time. States with more severe air pollution problems are required to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission test. This test simulates actual driving conditions on a dynamometer and permits more accurate measurement of tailpipe emitted pollution than the basic emission test.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and
states using two-wheel dynamometers in their emis- sion testing programs have EXEMPTED SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion of the testing program that involves a two-wheel dynamometer.
There are some states that use four-wheel dynamom- eters in their testing programs. When properly used, that equipment will not damage an AWD SUBARU ve- hicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear wheels be jacked off the ground, nor should the driveshaft be dis- connected for state emission testing.
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dy- namometer. Attempting to do so will result in uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby.
Resultant vehicle damage due to improper test- ing is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty and is the responsibility of the state
7-8
Starting and operating
inspection program or its contractors or licens- ees.
The EPA has issued regulations for inspecting the On- Board Diagnostic (OBD) system as part of the state emissions inspection. The OBD system is designed to detect engine and transmission problems that might cause vehicle emissions to exceed allowable limits. These inspections apply to all 1996 model year and newer passenger cars and light trucks. Several states plus the District of Columbia have opted to start the OBD system inspection prior to the required EPA reg- ulation effective date of January 1, 2002. Other states will add OBD system inspection in 2002.
The inspection of the OBD system consists of a vi- sual operational check of the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and an examination of the OBD system with an electronic scan tool while the engine is running
A vehicle passes the OBD system inspection if proper the CHECK ENGINE warning light/MIL illu- mination is observed, there is no stored diagnostic trouble codes, and the OBD system readiness moni- tors are complete.
A vehicle fails the OBD inspection if the CHECK ENGINE warning light/MIL is not properly operating
or there is one or more diagnostic trouble codes stored in vehicles computer with the CHECK ENGINE warning light/MIL illuminated.
A state emission inspection may reject (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of OBD system readiness monitors Not Ready is greater than three. Under this condition, the vehicle operator should be instruct- ed to drive his/her vehicle for a few days to set the monitors and return for an emission re-inspection.
Owners of rejected or failing vehicles should contact their SUBARU Dealer for service.
7-9
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
Preparing to drive You should perform the following checks and adjust- ments every day before you start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and lights are clean and unobstructed. 2. Check the appearance and condition of the tires. Also check tires for proper inflation. 3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of leaks. 4. Check that the hood and rear gate are fully closed. 5. Check the adjustment of the seat. 6. Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mir- rors. 7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your passengers have fastened their seatbelts. 8. Check the operation of the warning and indicator lights when the ignition switch is turned to the ON po- sition. 9. Check the gauges, indicator and warning lights af- ter starting the engine.
NOTE Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, washer flu- id and other fluid levels should be checked daily, weekly or at fuel stops.
Starting the engine
Do not operate the starter motor continuously for more than ten seconds. If the engine fails to start after operating the starter for five to ten seconds, wait for ten seconds or more before trying again.
Manual transmission vehicle 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories. 3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor while starting the engine. The starter motor will only operate when the clutch pedal is pressed fully to the floor. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check the operation of the warning and indicator lights. Refer to the Warning and indicator lights section (chapter 3). 5. Turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately after the engine has started.
7-10
Starting and operating
If the engine does not start, try the following: 1)Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait for at least 10 seconds. After checking that the parking brake is firmly set, turn the ignition switch to the START position while depressing the acceler- ator pedal slightly (about a quarter of the full stroke). Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the en- gine starts. 2) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch back to the OFF position and wait for at least 10 seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator pedal and turn the ignition switch to the START position. If the engine starts, quickly release the ac- celerator pedal. 3) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch again to the OFF position. After waiting for 10 seconds or longer, turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelera- tor pedal. 4) If the engine still refuses to start, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have gone off after the engine has started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the idle speed as the en- gine warms up.
NOTE The engine may be difficult to start when the bat-
tery has been disconnected and reconnected (for maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is caused by the electronically controlled throttles self-diagnosis function. To overcome it, keep the ignition switch in the ON position for approxi- mately 10 seconds before starting the engine.
Automatic transmission vehicle 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories. 3. Shift the selector lever to the P or N position (preferably P position). The starter motor will only operate when the select le- ver is at the P or N position. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check the operation of the warning and indicator lights. Refer to the Warning and indicator lights section (chapter 3). 5. Turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, try the following: 1)Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait for at least 10 seconds. After checking that the parking brake is firmly set, turn the ignition switch to the START position while depressing the acceler-
7-11
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
ator pedal slightly (about a quarter of the full stroke). Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the en- gine starts. 2) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch back to the OFF position and wait for at least 10 seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator pedal and turn the ignition switch to the START position. If the engine starts, quickly release the ac- celerator pedal. 3) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch again to the OFF position. After waiting for 10 seconds or longer, turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelera- tor pedal. 4) If the engine still refuses to start, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have gone out after the engine has started. The fuel injec- tion system automatically lowers the idle speed as the engine warms up.
While the engine is warming up, make sure that the selector lever is at the P or N position and that the parking brake is applied.
NOTE The engine may be difficult to start when the bat- tery has been disconnected and reconnected (for
maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is caused by the electronically controlled throttles self-diagnosis function. To overcome it, keep the ignition switch in the ON position for approxi- mately 10 seconds before starting the engine.
If you restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, shift the selector lever into the N po- sition. Do not attempt to place the selector lever of a moving vehicle into the P position.
7-12
Starting and operating
Stopping the engine The ignition switch should be turned off only when the engine is idling.
Do not stop the engine when the vehicle is mov- ing. This will cause loss of power to the power steering and the brake booster, making steer- ing and braking more difficult. It could also re- sult in accidental activation of the LOCK po- sition on the ignition switch, causing the steer- ing wheel to lock.
Manual transmission The manual transmission is a fully synchromeshed, 5- forward-speed and 1-reverse-speed transmission.
The shift pattern is shown on the shift lever knob. When shifting from 5th gear to reverse gear, first re- turn the shift lever to the neutral position then shift into reverse gear.
To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually let up on the clutch pedal. If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the transmission in neutral, release the clutch pedal momentarily, and then try again.
1 3 5 2 4 R
N
1
3 5 2
4 R
HS7008BA
7-13
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
Do not drive the vehicle with the clutch disen- gaged (i.e., when the clutch pedal is depressed) or with the shift lever in the neutral position. Engine braking has no effect in either of these conditions and the risk of an accident is conse- quently increased.
Shift into reverse ONLY when the vehicle has completely stopped. It may cause damage to the transmission to try shifting into reverse when the vehicle is moving.
Shifting speeds Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel economy and ve- hicle performance during normal driving is ensured by shifting up at the speeds listed in the following table.
Maximum allowable speeds The following table shows the maximum speeds that are possible with each different gear.
Never exceed the speed limit below for each gear po- sition except for brief acceleration in an emergency. The tachometers needle will enter the red area if these speeds are exceeded. Failure to observe this precaution can lead to excessive engine wear and poor fuel economy.
Shift up mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd 15 (24)
2nd to 3rd 25 (40)
3rd to 4th 40 (65)
4th to 5th 45 (73)
7-14
Starting and operating
mph (km/h)
When shifting down a gear, ensure that the ve- hicle is not traveling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear which is about to be selected. Failure to observe this precaution can lead to engine over-revving and this in turn can result in engine damage. In addition, sudden application of engine brakes when the vehicle is travelling on a slip- pery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a consequence, control of the vehicle may be lost and the risk of an accident increased.
Driving tips Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal
and do not use the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill on an upgrade. Either of those actions may cause clutch damage. Do not drive with your hand resting on the shift lever. This may cause wear on the transmission compo- nents.
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle speed due to slow traffic, turning corners, or driving up steep hills, downshift to a lower gear before the engine starts to labor.
On steep downgrades, downshift the transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as necessary; this helps to main- tain a safe speed and to extend brake pad life. In this way, the engine provides a braking effect. Re- member, if you ride (over use) the brakes while de- scending a hill, they may overheat and not work prop- erly.
Non-turbo models
Turbo models
1st 30 (49) 28 (46)
2nd 51 (82) 52 (83)
3rd 73 (117) 73 (118)
7-15
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
Automatic transmission The automatic transmission is electronically controlled and provides 4 forward speeds and 1 reverse speed.
NOTE When the engine coolant temperature is still
low, your vehicles automatic transmission will up-shift at higher engine speeds than when the coolant temperature is sufficiently high in order to shorten the warm-up time and improve driveabili- ty. The gearshift timing will automatically shift to the normal timing after the engine has warmed up.
Immediately after ATF (automatic transmission fluid) is replaced, you may feel that the automatic transmission operation is somewhat unusual. This results from erasure or invalidation of data the on-board computer has collected and stored in memory to allow the transmission to shift at the most appropriate times for the current condition of your vehicle. Optimized shifting will be restored as the vehicle continues to be driven for a while.
Do not shift from the P or N position into the D, 3, 2, 1 or R position while de- pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause
the vehicle to jump forward or backward.
Shift into the P or R position only after the vehicle is completely stopped. Shifting while the vehicle is moving may cause damage to the transmission.
Do not race the engine for more than five sec- onds in any position except the N or P po- sition when the brake is set or the tires are on blocks. This may cause the automatic transmis- sion fluid to overheat.
Avoid shifting from one of the forward driving positions into the R position or vice versa un- til the vehicle has completely stopped. Such shifting may cause damage to the transmis- sion.
7-16
Starting and operating
Selector lever for automatic transmis- sion
: With the brake pedal depressed, move the lever along the gate.
: Move the lever along the gate.
The selector lever has seven positions.
P (Park) This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the engine.
In this position, the transmission is mechanically locked to prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first set the parking brake fully, then shift into the P position. Do not hold the ve- hicle with only the transmission.
P
R N D 3 2 1
HS7009AA
HS7010BA
7-17
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
A shift interlock function is employed in the automatic transmission system to ensure safe starting of the ve- hicle. To shift the selector lever from the P to the any other position, you have to depress the brake pedal fully when the ignition switch is in the ON position. This prevents the vehicle from lurching when it is started.
If the shift lever does not move from the P position with the brake pedal depressed, refer to the Shift lock release section in this chapter.
R (Reverse) This position is for backing the vehicle.
To shift from the N to R position, first stop the vehi- cle completely then move the lever to the R position.
N (Neutral) This position is for restarting a stalled engine. In this position the wheels and transmission are not locked. In this position, the transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline un- less the parking brake or foot brake is on.
NOTE If you stop the engine with the selector lever in the N position, move the selector lever to the P position immediately. Otherwise, you may find
that the selector lever soon cannot be moved to the P position. If you find that the selector lever cannot be moved from the N position to the P position, turn the ignition switch to the ON posi- tion and try again.
Do not drive the vehicle with the selector lever in the N (neutral) position. Engine braking has no effect in this condition and the risk of an accident is consequently increased.
D (Drive) This position is for normal driving. The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to 4th according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require.
When more acceleration is required in this position, press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission will automatically downshift to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.
7-18
Starting and operating
While climbing a grade When driving up hill, undesired upshift to 4th gear is prevented from taking place when the accelerator pedal is released. This minimizes the chances of sub- sequent downshifting to a lower gear when accelerat- ing again. This prevents repeated upshifting and downshifting resulting in a smoother operation of the vehicle.
NOTE The transmission may downshift to 2nd or 1st gear, depending on the way the accelerator pedal is pressed to accelerate the vehicle again.
While going down a hill When descending a steep hill, depressing the brake pedal will cause the transmission to downshift to 3rd gear, thus applying engine braking. Reacceleration for a short time will cause the transmission to upshift nor- mally.
NOTE In some cases, depressing the brake pedal on a downhill grade does not result in an automatic downshift to 3rd gear. This can happen when the automatic transmission fluid temperature is very low, for example, during driving shortly after the vehicle has been parked for an extended period of
time. When the ATF temperature has risen to a cer- tain level, automatic downshift normally takes place. In the meantime, downshift manually for en- gine braking as required. Also, downshifting when braking downhill will not occur at speeds above approximately 48 mph (78 km/h).
3 (Third) This position is for using engine braking when going down a hill or for climbing a grade. The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to 3rd according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require.
When more acceleration is required in this position, press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission will automatically downshift to 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.
2 (Second) This position is for using engine braking when going down a hill or for climbing a steep grade. In this position, the transmission holds in the 2nd gear.
Use this position when starting off from a standstill on slippery road surfaces such as mud or snow. It will en-
7-19
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
sure greater traction.
1 (First) This position is for driving up or down very steep grades, or driving through mud or sand, or on slippery surfaces. In this position, the transmission holds in the 1st gear.
Maximum speeds The following tables show the maximum speeds that are possible with each different gear.
When shifting down a gear, it is important to confirm that the current vehicle speed is not in excess of the Maximum Allowable Speed of the gear which is about to be selected.
mph (km/h)
NOTE In order to prevent over-revving during decelera-
tion of the vehicle, the transmission will remain in the current gear if the speed of the vehicle is in ex- cess of the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear to which the selector lever has been moved.
When shifting down a gear, ensure that the ve- hicle is not travelling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear which is about to be selected. Failure to observe this precaution can lead to engine over-revving and this in turn can result in engine damage. In addition, sudden application of engine brakes when the vehicle is travelling on a slip- pery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a consequence, control of the vehicle may be lost and the risk of an accident increased.
Driving tips Always apply the foot or parking brake when the ve-
hicle is stopped in the D, 3, 2, 1 or R position. Always set the parking brake when parking your ve-
hicle. Do not hold the vehicle with only the transmis- sion.
Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on an uphill grade by using the D, 3, 2, or 1 position.
Non-turbo models
Turbo models
1st 28 (45) 29 (47)
2nd 61 (97) 60 (96)
3rd 96 (153) 103 (164)
7-20
Starting and operating
Use the brake instead.
Shift lock release If the selector lever does not move from the P posi- tion with the brake pedal depressed and the ignition switch in the ON position, perform the following steps:
To override the shift lock: 1. Set the parking brake and stop the engine. 2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag. 3. Remove the cover by prying on the edge with the screwdriver.
4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole. 5. Push down on the screwdriver and move the selec- tor lever from the P to the N position. 6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole. Depress the brake pedal and start the engine.
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer im- mediately to have the system repaired.
P
R N D 3 2 1
HS7009BA
HS7011BA
7-21
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
Rear viscous limited slip differential (LSD) (if equipped) The LSD provides optimum distribution of power ac- cording to the difference in revolutions between the right and left rear wheels that may be caused by cer- tain driving conditions, thereby improving driving sta- bility on snow-covered, muddy or other slippery roads.
Never start the engine while a tire on one side is jacked up, as the vehicle may move.
If one rear tire is spinning in mud, avoid con- tinued spinning at high speed as this could ad- versely affect the LSD.
If a different size rear tire is temporarily used (as in an emergency), it will adversely affect the LSD. Always replace it with a regular size tire as soon as possible.
Power steering The power steering system operates only when the engine is running. If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system fails to function, you can steer but it will take much more effort.
NOTE Right after the engine has been started and before it has warmed up, you may hear a noise coming from areas adjacent to the power steering pump which is located at the right-front area of the en- gine compartment. This noise is normal. It does not indicate power steering system trouble.
Do not hold the steering wheel at the fully locked position left or right for more than five seconds. This may damage the power steering pump.
7-22
Starting and operating
Braking
Braking tips
Never rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This can cause dangerous overheating of the brakes and needless wear on the brake pads and linings.
When the brakes get wet When driving in rain or after washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result, brake stopping dis- tance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehi- cle at a safe speed while lightly depressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
Use of engine braking Remember to make use of engine braking in addition to foot braking. When descending a grade, if only the foot brake is used, the brakes may start working im- properly because of brake fluid overheating, caused by overheated brake pads. To help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to get stronger engine braking.
Braking when a tire is punctured Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly when a tire is punctured. This could cause a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place.
Brake system Two separate circuits
Your vehicle has two separate circuit brake systems. Each circuit works diagonally across the vehicle. If one circuit of the brake system should fail, the other half of the system still works. If one circuit fails, the brake pedal will go down much closer to the floor than usual and you will need to press it down much harder. And a much longer distance will be needed to stop the vehi- cle.
Brake booster The brake booster uses engine manifold vacuum to assist braking force. Do not turn off the engine while driving because that will turn off the brake booster, re- sulting in poor braking power. The brakes will continue to work even when the brake booster completely stops functioning. If this happens, however, you will have to push the pedal much harder
7-23
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
than normal and the braking distance will increase.
Disc brake pad wear warning indica- tors
The disc brake pad wear warning indicators on the disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn. If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard from the disc brakes while braking, immediately have your vehicle checked by your SUBARU dealer.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) The ABS system prevents the lock-up of wheels which may occur during sudden braking or braking on slip- pery road surfaces. This helps prevent the loss of steering control and directional stability caused by wheel lock-up.
When the ABS system is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal when the ABS operates.
The ABS system will not operate when the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
Always use the utmost care in driving over- confidence because you are driving with an ABS equipped vehicle could easily lead to a se- rious accident.
The ABS system does not always decrease stopping distance. You should always maintain a safe following distance from other vehicles.
HS7012BA
7-24
Starting and operating
When driving on badly surfaced roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or over deep newly fallen snow, stopping distances may be longer for a vehicle with the ABS system than one without. When driving under these conditions, there- fore, reduce your speed and leave ample dis- tance from other vehicles.
When you feel the ABS system operating, you should maintain constant brake pedal pres- sure. Do not pump the brake pedal since doing so may defeat the operation of the ABS system.
ABS system self-check You may feel a slight shock in the brake pedal and hear the operating sound of ABS from the engine com- partment just after the vehicle is started. This is caused by an automatic functional test of the ABS sys- tem being carried out and does not indicate any abnor- mal condition.
ABS warning light
The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after about two seconds. This is an indication that the ABS system is working properly. When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such as when the engine is jump started, the ABS warning light may come on. This is due to the low battery volt- age and does not indicate a malfunction. When the battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out.
US1115CA
7-25
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
If the warning light behaves as follows, the ABS system may not be working properly. When the warning light is on, the ABS function shuts down; however, the conventional brake system continues to operate normally.
The warning light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, but it does not go out even when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).
The warning light comes on during driving.
If these occur, have the ABS system repaired at the first available opportunity by your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE If the warning light behavior is as described be- low, the ABS system may be considered normal.
The warning light comes on right after the en- gine is started but goes out immediately, remain- ing off.
The warning light remains on after the engine has been started, but it goes out when the vehicle
speed reaches about 8 mph (12 km/h). The warning light comes on during driving, but
it goes out immediately and remains off.
7-26
Starting and operating
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system (if equipped) The EBD system maximizes the effectiveness of the brakes by allowing the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion of the braking force. It functions by adjust- ing the distribution of braking force to the rear wheels in accordance with the vehicles loading condition and speed. The EBD system is an integral part of the ABS system and uses some of the ABS systems components to perform its function of optimizing the distribution of braking force. If any of the ABS components used by the EBD function fails, the EBD system also stops working.
When the EBD system is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunc- tion.
Steps to take if EBD system fails
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system, the system stops working and the brake system warning light and ABS warning light come on simultaneously.
The EBD system may be faulty if the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simulta- neously during driving. Even if the EBD system fails, the conventional braking system will still function. However, the rear wheels will be more prone to locking when the brakes are applied harder than usual and the vehicles motion may there- fore become somewhat harder to control. If the brake system warning light and ABS warning
US1115DA
7-27
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
light illuminate simultaneously, take the following steps: 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat place. 2. Shut down the engine, then restart it. 3. Release the parking brake. If both warning lights go out, the EBD system may be faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected. 4. If both warning lights come on again and stay illu- minated after the engine has been restarted, shut down the engine again, apply the parking brake, and check the brake fluid level. 5. If the brake fluid level is not below the MIN mark, the EBD system may be faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system inspect- ed. 6. If the brake fluid level is below the MIN mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Instead, have the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
Driving with the brake system warning light on is dangerous. This indicates your brake sys- tem may not be working properly. If the light re- mains on, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer immediately.
If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are
operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
7-28
Starting and operating
Vehicle Dynamics Control system (if equipped)
Always use the utmost care in driving over- confidence because you are driving with a Ve- hicle Dynamics Control system equipped vehi- cle could easily lead to a serious accident.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Dynamics Control, winter tires or snow chains should be used when driving on snow-covered or icy roads; in addition, vehicle speed should be reduced considerably. Simply having a Vehi- cle Dynamics Control system does not guaran- tee that the vehicle will be able to avoid acci- dents in any situation.
Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is an indication that the road being trav- elled on has a slippery surface; since having Vehicle Dynamics Control is no guarantee that full vehicle control will be maintained at all times and under all conditions, its activation
should be seen as a sign that the speed of the vehicle should be reduced considerably.
Whenever suspension components, steering components, or an axle are removed from a ve- hicle equipped with Vehicle Dynamics Control, have an authorized SUBARU dealer perform an inspection of that system.
The following precautions should be ob- served in order to ensure that the Vehicle Dy- namics Control system is operating properly:
All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size, type, and brand. Furthermore, the amount of wear should be the same for all four tires. Keep the tire pressure at the proper level as shown on the placard attached to the vehi- cles door pillar. Use only the special temporary spare tire to replace a flat tire. With a temporary spare tire, the effectiveness of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is reduced and this should be taken into account when driving the vehicle in such a condition.
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding on a slippery road surface and/or during cornering and/or an eva- sive maneuver, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
7-29
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
adjusts the engines output and the wheels respective braking forces to help maintain traction and directional control.
Traction Control Function The traction control function is designed to prevent spinning of the driving wheels on slippery road surfac- es, thereby helping to maintain traction and directional control. Activation of this function is shown by steady illumination of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light.
Skid Suppression Function The skid suppression function is designed to help maintain directional stability by suppressing the wheels tendency to slide sideways during steering op- erations. Activation of this function is shown by flash- ing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indica- tor light.
NOTE Slight twitching of the brake pedal may be felt
when the Vehicle Dynamics Control system oper- ates; a small degree of vehicle or steering wheel shaking may also be noticed in this situation. These are normal characteristics of Vehicle Dy- namics Control operation and are no cause for alarm.
When driving off immediately after starting the engine, a short-lived operation noise may be no- ticed coming from the engine compartment. This noise is generated as a result of a check being per- formed on the Vehicle Dynamics Control system and is normal.
Depending on the timing of activation of the brakes, certain situations may occur just after driving off where the brake pedal seems to exhibit a jolting motion. This too is a consequence of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operational check and is normal.
In the circumstances listed below, the vehicle may be more unstable than it feels to the driver. The Vehicle Dynamics Control System may there- fore operate. Such operation does not indicate a system fault.
on gravel-covered or rutted roads on unfinished roads when the vehicle is towing a trailer when the vehicle is fitted with snow tires or
winter tires Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem will cause operation of the steering wheel to feel slightly different compared to that for normal conditions.
Even if the vehicle is equipped with a Vehicle
7-30
Starting and operating
Dynamics Control system, it is important that win- ter tires be used when driving on snow-covered or icy roads. (All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size and brand). Furthermore, if snow chains are to be used, they should be fitted on the front wheels. When a vehicle is fitted with snow chains, however, the effectiveness of the Ve- hicle Dynamics Control system is reduced and this should be taken into account when driving the vehicle in such a condition.
It is always important to reduce speed when ap- proaching a corner, even if the vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Dynamics Control.
All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size, type, and brand; furthermore, the amount of wear should be the same for all four tires. If these precautions are not observed and non-matching tires are used, it is quite possible that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be unable to operate correctly as intended.
Always turn off the engine before replacing a tire as failure to do so may render the Vehicle Dy- namics Control system unable to operate correct- ly.
Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light
The indicator light turns on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position; it turns off approximately two seconds later. This indicator light flashes during activation of the skid suppression function and is illu- minated steadily during activation of the traction con- trol function.
The following two situations could indicate a malfunc- tion of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system; if either
US1115EA
7-31
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
should occur, have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of that system at the first avail- able opportunity.
The indicator light does not turn on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position.
The indicator light does not turn off approximately two seconds after the ignition key has been turned to the ON position.
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehi- cle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
This single light has the function of indicating malfunc- tions in the Vehicle Dynamics Control system and the function of indicating that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system is not operating. It comes on in the event of a malfunction in the system and is illuminated when- ever the system is not operating.
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes off several sec- onds after engine startup.This lighting pattern indi- cates that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is op- erating normally.
The following situations could indicate a malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system; if any should occur, have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of the system at the first available oppor- tunity.
The warning light does not turn on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position.
The warning light turns on while the vehicle is being driven.
When a malfunction has occurred in the Vehicle Dy- namics Control electrical system, only the warning light will turn on. In such an event, the ABS will still be operating normally.
The warning light will also turn on when a problem occurs with the ABS or Vehicle Dynamics Control electronic control systems. Because the Vehicle Dynamics Control system con-
US1115FA
7-32
Starting and operating
trols each brake through the ABS, whenever the ABS stops operating due to a malfunction in that electrical system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control will also be- come unable to control all four brakes. Thus Vehicle Dynamics Control system operation halts and the warning light turns on. Although both the Vehicle Dy- namics Control system and the ABS will be inoperable in this situation, it will still be possible to stop the vehi- cle using normal braking. The Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system and the ABS do not adversely affect oper- ation of the vehicle in any way when they are inopera- ble; however should such a situation occur, drive with care and have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of those systems at the first available opportunity.
NOTE When the warning light turns on and off in the fol- lowing way, it indicates that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is operating normally.
Although turning on after the engine has been started, the warning light quickly turns off and stays off.
The warning light turns on when the vehicle is being driven; it then turns off and stays off.
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light This light comes on to indicate that the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system is in non-operation mode. This does not constitute failure of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
NOTE The indicator light may stay on for a while after
the engine has been started, especially in cold weather. This occurs because the engine has not yet warmed up and is completely normal. The light will turn off when the engine has reached a suit- able operating temperature.
When an engine problem occurs and the mal- function indicator lamp turns on, the indicator light will also come on.
The following two situations could indicate malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system; if either should occur, have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of that system at the first avail- able opportunity.
The indicator light does not turn on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position.
The indicator light fails to turn off after the engine is started, even when several minutes have passed to al- low the engine to heat up sufficiently.
7-33
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
Pressing the switch to deactivate the Vehicle Dynam- ics Control system can facilitate the following opera- tions:
a standing start on a steeply sloping road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or otherwise slippery surface
extrication of the vehicle when its wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow When the switch is pressed during engine operation, the indicator light illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be deactivated and the vehicle will behave like a model not equipped with the Vehicle Dy- namics Control system. When the switch is pressed again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem, the indicator light goes off. With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system deactivat- ed, traction and stability enhancement offered by Ve- hicle Dynamics Control system is unavailable. There- fore you should not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system except under above-mentioned situa- tions.
NOTE When the switch has been pressed to deactivate
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system automatically reacti- vates itself the next time the ignition key is turned to the OFF position and the engine is restarted.
If the switch is held down for 10 seconds or longer, the indicator light goes off, the Vehicle Dy- namics Control system is activated, and the sys- tem ignores any further pressing of the switch. To make the switch usable again, turn the ignition key to the OFF position and restart the engine.
When the switch is pressed to deactivate the Ve- hicle Dynamics Control system, the vehicles run- ning performance is comparable with that of a ve- hicle that does not have a Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system. Do not deactivate the Vehicle Dynam- ics Control system except when absolutely neces- sary.
US7023AA
7-34
Starting and operating
Parking your vehicle
Parking brake To set the parking brake, press the brake pedal firmly and hold it down while fully pulling up the parking brake lever.
To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the release button, then lower the lever while keeping the button pressed. When the parking brake is set while the engine is run- ning, the parking brake warning light comes on. After starting the vehicle, be sure that the warning light has gone out before the vehicle is driven. Refer to the
Warning and indicator lights section (chapter 3).
Never drive while the parking brake is set be- cause this will cause unnecessary wear on the brake linings. Before starting to drive, always make sure that the parking brake has been fully released.
Parking tips When parking your vehicle, always set the parking brake firmly and put the shift lever in the 1 (1st) for an upgrade or R (Reverse) for a downgrade for manual transmission vehicles, or in the P (Park) position for automatic transmission vehicles. Always set the park- ing brake firmly when parking your vehicle. Never rely on the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.HS7014BA
7-35
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
When parking on a hill, always turn the steering wheel. When the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front wheels should be turned away from the curb.
When facing downhill, the front wheels should be turned into the curb.
Never leave unattended children or pets in the vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent oper- ation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, the temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people.
Do not park the vehicle over flammable mate- rials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags, as
US7510AA US7511AA
7-36
Starting and operating
they may burn easily if they come near hot en- gine or exhaust system parts.
Be sure to stop the engine if you take a nap in the vehicle. If engine exhaust gas enters the passenger compartment, occupants in the ve- hicle could die from carbon monoxide (CO) contained in the exhaust gas.
Hill holder (for manual transmission if equipped) The Hill holder is a device to make starting on an uphill grade easier.
On an uphill grade, when the clutch pedal is de- pressed while the brake pedal is also depressed, brak- ing power is maintained temporarily by the Hill holder when the brake pedal is released. The driver is there- fore able to start the vehicle the same way as on a lev- el grade, just using the clutch and accelerator pedal.
US7512BA
7-37
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
The Hill holder does not operate when the vehicle is facing downhill. And the Hill holder may not operate on slight grades.
When starting in reverse and using the Hill holder, a braking effect may be felt even after the brake pedal has been released. However, this braking effect should disappear once the clutch pedal is released.
A slight jolt may be felt when the vehicle begins to move forward after being reversed.
If the braking power of the Hill holder is insufficient af- ter the brake pedal is released, apply more braking power by pressing the brake pedal again.
The Hill Holder is a device only for helping the driver to START the vehicle on an uphill grade. To prevent accidents when the vehicle is parked on a slope, be sure to firmly set the parking brake. When setting the parking brake, make sure that the vehicle remains stationary when the clutch pedal is released.
US7513BA
7-38
Starting and operating
Cruise control (if equipped) Cruise control enables you to maintain a constant ve- hicle speed without holding your foot on the accelera- tor pedal and it is operative when the vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the main switch is turned OFF when the cruise control is not in use to avoid unintentionally setting the cruise control.
Do not use the cruise control under any of the following conditions. This may cause loss of vehicle control:
driving up or down a steep grade driving on slippery or winding roads driving in heavy traffic
To set cruise control 0
1. Push the main switch button.
UB7202BA
7-39
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
The indicator light on the combination meter will come on. 2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the vehicle reaches the desired speed.
3. Push the control lever downward in the SET/ COAST direction and release it. Then release the ac- celerator pedal.
US1115GA UB7203BA
7-40
Starting and operating
At this time, the indicator light is illuminated in the combination meter. The vehicle will maintain the desired speed.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily increased while driving with the cruise control activated. Simply de- press the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will return to and maintain the previous cruising speed.
To temporarily cancel the cruise con- trol
There are four ways to cancel the cruise control tem- porarily:
Pull the control lever in the CANCEL direction (if so equipped).
Depress the brake pedal. Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission ve-
hicles only). Shift the selector lever into the N position (auto-
matic transmission vehicles only). Shift the shift lever into neutral (manual transmis-
sion vehicles only).
The indicator light in the combination meter goes off when the cruise control is cancelled.
To resume the cruise control after it has been tempo- rarily canceled and with vehicle speed of about 20
US1115HA UB7204BA
7-41
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
mph (32 km/h) or more, push the control lever upward in the RES/ACC direction to return to the original cruising speed automatically. The indicator light in the combination meter will automatically come on at this time.
To turn off the cruise control There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
Push the main switch again. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or LOCK po-
sition (but only when the vehicle is completely stopped).
To change the cruising speed To increase the speed (by control lever)
Push the control lever upward in the RES/ACC direc- tion and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed. Then, release the control lever. The vehicle speed at that moment will be memorized and treated as the new set speed.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the control lever upward in the RES/ ACC direction quickly within 0.25 second.
UB7203CA
7-42
Starting and operating
To increase the speed (by accelerator pedal) 1. Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the ve- hicle to the desired speed. 2. Push the control lever downward in the SET/ COAST direction once. Now the desired speed is set and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.
NOTE If the difference between the actual vehicle speed when the control lever is pushed downward and the speed last time you set it is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). This occurs because the cruise control system unit regards this lever operation as that intended to decrease the vehicle speed.
To decrease the speed (by control lever)
Push the control lever downward in the SET/COAST direction and hold it until the vehicle reaches the de- sired speed. Then, release the control lever. The vehi- cle speed at that moment will be memorized and treat- ed as the new set speed.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the control lever downward in the SET/ COAST direction quickly within 0.25 second.
UB7203BA
7-43
Starting and operating
CONTINUED
To decrease the speed (by brake pedal) 1. Depress the brake pedal to release cruise control temporarily. 2. When the speed decreases to the desired speed, press the control lever downward in the SET/COAST direction once. Now the desired speed is set and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without de- pressing the accelerator pedal.
Self-leveling rear suspension (if equipped) The self-leveling suspension adjusts the vehicle body position automatically to keep it level at all times irre- spective of the number of occupants and the amount of cargo.
The self-leveling system is incorporated in the rear suspension shock absorber and operates only when the vehicle is in motion.
HS7019BA
7-44
Starting and operating
Owing to the self-leveling suspension, the vehicle body is adjusted to the proper position after several drive trips, even if the rear of the vehicle is lowered by loaded cargos or a coupled trailer.
If cargos are unloaded all at once, the vehicle height may become higher than the normal level. This is be- cause that the hydraulic pressure in the self-leveling suspension was increased for leveling the body when the cargos were loaded. In such a case, the vehicle height will return to the original level after several driv- ing trips.
NOTE If the rear axle is loaded excessively, the vehicle
body may not be adjusted to the proper position.
HS7020BA
8-1
8
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) .............................. 8-2
Fuel economy hints ...................................... 8-2 Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ... 8-3 Catalytic converter ....................................... 8-4 Periodic inspections .................................... 8-5 Driving in foreign countries ......................... 8-6 Driving tips for AWD vehicles ..................... 8-6 Off road driving ............................................ 8-8 Winter driving ............................................... 8-10
Operation during cold weather ........................ 8-10 Driving on snowy and icy roads ...................... 8-11 Corrosion protection ........................................ 8-12 Snow tires .......................................................... 8-13 Tire chains ......................................................... 8-13 Rocking the vehicle .......................................... 8-14
Loading your vehicle ................................... 8-14 Vehicle capacity weight .................................... 8-16 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........ 8-16 Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped) ............... 8-17
Trailer hitch (if equipped) ............................ 8-22 Connecting a trailer .......................................... 8-23 When you do not tow a trailer .......................... 8-25
Trailer towing ................................................ 8-25 Warranties and maintenance ........................... 8-25 Maximum load limits ......................................... 8-26 Trailer hitches ................................................... 8-30 Connecting a trailer .......................................... 8-31
Trailer towing tips ............................................. 8-33
8-2
Driving tips
Driving tipsNew vehicle break-in driving the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) The performance and long life of your vehicle are de- pendent on how you handle and care for your vehicle while it is new. Follow these instructions during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km):
Do not race the engine. And do not allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm except in an emergency.
Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or slow.
Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, ex- cept in an emergency.
Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency.
The same break-in procedures should be applied to an overhauled engine, newly mounted engine or when brake pads or brake linings are replaced with new ones.
Fuel economy hints The following suggestions will help to save your fuel.
Select the proper gear position for the speed and road conditions.
Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. Always accelerate gently until you reach the desired speed. Then try to maintain that speed for as long as possible.
Do not pump the accelerator and avoid racing the engine.
Avoid unnecessary engine idling. Keep the engine properly tuned. Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure shown
on the tire placard, which is located under the door latch on the drivers side. Low pressure will increase tire wear and fuel consumption.
Use the air conditioner only when necessary. Keep the front and rear wheels in proper alignment. Avoid carrying unnecessary cargo.
8-3
Driving tips
CONTINUED
Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monox- ide)
Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine ex- haust gas contains carbon monoxide, a color- less and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas from en- tering the vehicle.
Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.
Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a lengthy time while the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system always works properly.
If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open. Keep the rear gate closed while driving to
prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
NOTE Due to the expansion and contraction of the met- als used in the manufacture of the exhaust sys- tem, you may hear a crackling sound coming from the exhaust system for a short time after the en- gine has been shut off. This sound is normal.
8-4
Driving tips
Catalytic converter
Turbo model
Non-turbo model
The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust sys- tem. It serves as catalyst to reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter: Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small amount of
leaded fuel will damage the catalytic converter. Never start the engine by pushing or pulling the ve-
hicle. Avoid racing the engine. Never turn off the ignition switch while the vehicle is
moving. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel the engine
US8511BA
HS8002BA
8-5
Driving tips
CONTINUED
running rough (misfiring, backfiring or incomplete combustion), have your vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
Do not apply undercoating or rust prevention treat- ment to the heat shield of catalytic converter and the exhaust system.
Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive or park the vehicle anywhere near flammable materials (e.g. grass, paper, rags or leaves), because the catalytic converter operates at very high tem- peratures.
Keep everyone and flammable materials away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very hot.
Periodic inspections To keep your vehicle in the best condition at all times, always have the recommended maintenance services listed in the maintenance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet performed at the specified time or mileage intervals.
8-6
Driving tips
Driving in foreign countries When planning to use your vehicle in another country:
Confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (Refer to the Fuel requirements section in chapter 7.)
Comply with all regulations and requirements of each country.
Driving tips for AWD vehicles
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles provide better traction when driving on slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By shifting power between the front and rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide added traction during acceler- ation and added engine braking force during deceler- ation.
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle may handle differently than an ordinary two wheel drive vehicle and it contains some features unique to AWD. For
HS8003BA
8-7
Driving tips
CONTINUED
safety purposes as well as to avoid damaging the AWD system, you should keep the following tips in mind:
An AWD vehicle is better able to climb steeper roads under snowy or slippery conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. There is little difference in han- dling, however, during extremely sharp turns or sud- den braking. Therefore, when driving down a slope or turning corners, be sure to reduce your speed and maintain an ample distance from other vehicles.
When replacing a tire, make sure you use only the same size, construction, brand, and load range as the original tires listed on the tire placard. Using other siz- es or construction may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and may af- fect ride, handling, braking, speedometer/odometer calibration, and clearance between the body and tires. It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control.
Always check the cold tire pressure before starting to drive. The recommended tire pressure is provided on the tire placard, which is located under the door latch on the drivers side.
Tire chains should always be placed on the front wheels only.
There are some precautions that you must observe when towing your vehicle. For detail information, see
the Towing section in chapter 9.
Always maintain a safe driving speed accord- ing to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.
Always use the utmost care in driving over- confidence because you are driving an All- Wheel Drive vehicle could easily lead to a seri- ous accident.
8-8
Driving tips
Off road driving Because of the AWD feature and higher ground clear- ance, your SUBARU can be driven on ordinary roads or off-road. But please keep in mind that an AWD SUBARU is a passenger car and is neither a conven- tional off-road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take your SUBARU off-road, certain common sense precautions such as the following should be taken:
Make certain that you and all of your passengers are wearing seatbelts.
Carry some emergency equipment, such as a tow- ing rope or chain, a shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or citizens band radio.
Drive carefully. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous areas or over rough terrain.
Slow down and employ extra caution at all times. When driving off-road, you will not have the benefit of marked traffic lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and the like.
Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead, drive ei- ther straight up or straight down the slopes. A vehicle can much more easily tip over sideways than it can end over end. Avoid driving straight up or down slopes that are too steep.
Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, especially at higher
speeds. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering
wheel. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim.
If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the stream bed for firmness and ensure that the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly and com- pletely through the stream. The water should be shal- low enough that it does not reach the vehicles under- carriage. Water entering the engine air intake or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto electrical parts may damage your vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never attempt to drive through rushing water; regard- less of its depth, it can wash away the ground from un- der your tires, resulting in possible loss of traction and even vehicle rollover.
Always check your brakes for effectiveness immedi- ately after driving in sand, mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and stepping on the brake pedal. Re- peat that process several times to dry out the brake discs and brake pads.
Do not drive or park over or near flammable materi- als such as dry grass or fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The exhaust system is very hot while the engine is running and right after the engine stops. This
8-9
Driving tips
CONTINUED
could create a fire hazard. After driving through tall grass, mud, rocks, sand,
rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the under- body. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a mechanical breakdown or fire could occur.
Secure all cargo carried inside the vehicle and make certain that it is not piled higher than the seatbacks. During sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be thrown around in the vehicle and cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. Those loads raise the vehicles center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over.
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from sand or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move the selector lever back and forth between D and R repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best pos- sible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle. When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).
Never equip your vehicle with tires larger than those specified in this manual.
Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle under hard-driv-
ing conditions such as rough roads or off roads will ne- cessitate more frequent replacement of engine oil, brake fluid and transmission oil than that specified in the maintenance schedule described in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.
Remember that damage done to your SUBARU while operating it off-road and not using common sense pre- cautions such as those listed above is not eligible for warranty coverage.
Wash the vehicles underbody after off-road driving. Suspension components are particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they need to be washed thoroughly.
Always maintain a safe driving speed accord- ing to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.
Always use the utmost care in driving over- confidence because you are driving an All- Wheel Drive vehicle could easily lead to a seri- ous accident.
8-10
Driving tips
Winter driving
Operation during cold weather Carry some emergency equipment, such as tire chains, a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares, a small shovel, and jumper cables.
Check the battery and cables. Cold temperatures re- duce battery capacity. The battery must be in good condition to provide enough power for cold winter starts.
Use an engine oil of proper grade and viscosity for cold weather. Heavy summer oil will cause harder
starting.
Keep the door locks from freezing by squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage or separate the rubber weather strips around the door. If the door is frozen, use hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that contains an anti- freeze solution. Do not use engine antifreeze or other substitutes because they may damage the paint of the vehicle.
Before driving your vehicle Before entering the vehicle, remove any snow or ice from your shoes because that could make the pedals slippery and dangerous.
While warming up the vehicle before driving, check that the accelerator pedal, brake pedal, and all other controls operate smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow that has accumulated under the fenders to avoid making steering difficult. During severe winter driving, stop when and where it is safe to do so and check under the fenders periodically.
HS8004AA
8-11
Driving tips
CONTINUED
Parking in cold weather Do not use the parking brake when parking for long periods in cold weather since it could freeze in that po- sition. Instead, observe the following: 1. Place the shift lever in 1 or R for manual trans- mission vehicles, and in P for automatic transmission vehicles. 2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving.
When the vehicle is parked in snow or when it snows, raise the wiper blades off the glass to prevent damage to them.
When the vehicle has been left parked after use on roads heavily covered with snow, or has been left parked during a snowstorm, icing may develop on the brake system, which could cause poor braking action. Check for snow or ice buildup on the suspension, disc brakes and brake hoses underneath the vehicle. If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, being careful not to damage the disc brakes and brake hoses and ABS harness.
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust
pipe and from around your vehicle if you park the vehicle in snow with the engine running.
Refueling in cold weather To help prevent moisture from forming in the fuel sys- tem and the risk of its freezing, use of an antifreeze ad- ditive in the fuel tank is recommended during cold weather. Use only additives that are specifically designed for this purpose. When an antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts longer if the tank is refilled whenever the fuel level reaches half empty.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used for an extend- ed period, it is best to have the fuel tank filled to capac- ity.
Driving on snowy and icy roads To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid sudden brak- ing, abrupt acceleration, high-speed driving, and sharp turning when driving on snowy or icy roads. Always maintain ample distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you to avoid the need for sud- den braking. To supplement the foot brake, use the engine brake effectively to control the vehicle speed. (Shift into a
8-12
Driving tips
lower gear when necessary.) Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behavior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly leading to loss of vehicle control.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) enhances your vehi- cles braking performance on snowy and icy roads. Refer to the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) section in chapter 7 for information on braking on slippery sur- faces.
Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads such as snowy or icy roads. This may cause loss of vehicle control.
Wiper operation when snowing Before driving in cold weather, make sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield or rear window. If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield or rear window, use the defroster with the airflow control but- ton/dial in the position and the temperature control dial set for maximum warmth until the wiper blades are completely thawed out. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper deicer, it is helpful to thaw the windshield wiper blades. To thaw out the rear wiper
blade, use the rear window defogger.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts to stick on the surface of the windshield despite wiper operation, use the defroster with the airflow control button/dial in and the temperature control dial set for maxi- mum warmth. After the windshield gets warmed enough to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away us- ing the windshield washer.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the wiper from working effectively. If snow is stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the vehicle at road side, use the hazard warning flasher to alert other drivers.
We recommend use of non-freezing type wiper blades (winter blades) during the seasons you could have snow and sub-zero temperatures. Blades of this type give superior wiping performance in snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades that are suitable for your vehi- cle.
Corrosion protection Refer to the Corrosion protection section (chapter 10).
8-13
Driving tips
CONTINUED
Snow tires
When replacing original tires with winter (snow) tires, make sure you use only the same size, construction and load range as the origi- nal tires listed on the tire placard. Using other sizes and construction may affect speedome- ter/odometer calibration and clearance be- tween the body and tires. It also may be danger- ous and lead to loss of vehicle control.
You must install four winter tires that are of the same size, construction, brand, and load range. Mixing other sizes or constructions may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and may affect ride, han- dling, braking and speedometer/odometer cali- bration. It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control.
Do not use a combination of radial, belted bias or bias tires since it may cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead to an acci- dent.
Your vehicle is equipped with all season tires as orig- inal equipment, which are designed to provide an ad-
equate measure of traction, handling and braking per- formance in year-round driving. In winter, it may be possible to enhance performance through use of tires designed specifically for winter driving conditions. When you choose to install winter tires on your vehi- cle, be sure to use the correct tire size and type. You must install four winter tires that are of the same size, construction, brand and load range and you should never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this may result in dangerous handling characteristics. When you choose a tire, make sure that there is enough clearance between the tire and vehicle body.
Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of the type of tires on your vehicle.
Tire chains Driving on snowy grades or icy roads may require the use of tire chains, in which case put the chains on the front wheels only. Use only SAE class S type chains that are of the correct size for your tires so as not to damage the vehicle body or suspension. When driving with tire chains, drive at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h).
Always use the utmost care when driving with tire chains overconfidence because you are driving with tire chains could easily lead to a serious accident.
8-14
Driving tips
Rocking the vehicle If you must rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move the selector lever back and forth between D and R repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).
Refer to the Automatic transmission section in chap- ter 7 for information on holding the transmission in 2nd position.
Loading your vehicle
Never allow passengers to ride on the folded rear seatback or in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury.
Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident. Keep lug- gage or cargo low, as close to the floor as pos- sible.
8-15
Driving tips
CONTINUED
When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle during sudden stops, sharp turns or in an accident.
Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. These loads raise the vehicles center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over.
Secure lengthy items properly to prevent them from shooting forward and causing seri- ous injury during a sudden stop.
Never exceed the maximum load limit. If you do, some parts on your vehicle can break, or it
can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause per- sonal injury. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Do not place anything on the extended cargo area cover. Such items could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or a collision. This could cause serious injury.
Do not carry spray cans, containers with flam- mable or corrosive liquids or any other danger- ous items inside the vehicle.
NOTE For better fuel economy, do not carry unneeded cargo.
HS8005BA
8-16
Driving tips
Vehicle capacity weight The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. The maximum load you can carry in your vehicle is shown on the ve- hicle placard attached to the drivers side door pillar. It includes the total weight of driver and all passengers and their belongings, any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The certification plate attached to the drivers side
HS8006BA
HS8024BA
HS8007BA
8-17
Driving tips
CONTINUED
door jamb shows GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- ing) and GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating). The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the combined total of weight of the vehicle, fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any op- tional equipment and trailer tongue load. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation. The GVWR equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your ve- hicle including standard equipment, fluids, emergen- cy tools and spare tire assembly) plus the vehicle ca- pacity weight.
In addition, the total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating luggage in- side the vehicle. Even if the total weight of your luggage is lower than the vehicle capacity weight, either front or rear GAW may exceed the GAWR, depending on the distribution of the luggage. When possible, the load should be evenly distributed throughout the vehicle. If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you should con- firm that GVW and front and rear GAWs are within the GVWR and GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehi- cle scale, found at a commercial weighing station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower load range
than the originals because they may lower the GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a high- er load range than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped) The roof rail is not designed to carry cargo by itself. Cargo can be carried after securing the roof crossbar kit to the roof rail and installing the appropriate carry- ing attachment. When installing the roof crossbar kit, follow the manufacturers instructions.
When you carry cargo on the roof using the roof cross- bar kit and a carrying attachment, never exceed the maximum load limit explained below. You should also be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). See the Loading your vehicle section in this chapter for information on loading cargo into or onto your vehicle. The maximum load limit of the cargo, crossbars and carrying attach- ment must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg). Place the heaviest load at the bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo. Always properly secure all cargo.
8-18
Driving tips
For cargo carrying purposes, the roof rail must be used together with a roof crossbar kit and the appropriate carrying attachment. The roof rail must never be used alone to carry car- go. Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint or a dangerous road hazard due to loss of cargo could result.
When using the roof crossbar kit, make sure that the total weight of the crossbars, carrying attachment and cargo does not exceed the maximum load limit. Overloading may cause damage to the vehicle and create a safety haz- ard.
Installing carrying attachments on the cross- bars
When installing any carrying attachment such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the crossbars, follow the manufacturers in- structions and make sure that the attachment is se- curely fixed to the crossbars. Use only attachments designed specifically for the crossbars. A set of cross- bars is designed to carry loads (cargo and attachment) of not more than 150 lbs (68 kg). Before operating the
vehicle, make sure that the cargo is properly secured on the attachment.
NOTE Remember that the vehicles center of gravity is al- tered with the weight of the load on the roof, thus affecting the driving characteristics. Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be in- creased.
Removal and installation of the crossbars The crossbars can be removed when you do not use the roof to carry cargo.
8-19
Driving tips
CONTINUED
To remove the crossbar 0
A) Crossbar end support B) T-30 torx head screw
1. Loosen and remove the T-30 torx head screw from the top of each crossbar end support. 2. Move the end support and inner clamp to unhook each side of the crossbar from the roof rail.
3. Carefully raise the crossbar from roof rails.
NOTE It may be necessary to move the Front crossbar rearward, near the center of the roof rail for easier removal. Use care not to cross-thread the screw in the insert if it has been removed.
To install the crossbar Front crossbar: Front crossbar has 150 LBS. Load Label on right hand side.
A
B HS8028BC
HS8025BA
8-20
Driving tips
A) Crossbar end support B) T-30 torx head screw
1. Before placing the crossbar on the roof rails, make sure that the T-30 torx head screw is fully loosened from each end support. 2. Spread the inner clamp and the end support as far apart as possible.
A) Load label B) Direction arrow label C) 6 in (150 mm)
3. With the front direction arrow label on the top right side of the crossbar pointing toward the front of the ve- hicle, carefully place the crossbar across the top of the vehicle so that the crossbar end supports rest on the top of the roof rails approximately 6 inches (150 mm) rearward in the front radius of the roof rail. 4. Move the end support and inner clamp to hook un- der the end of the roof rail on both sides and loosely assemble the T-30 torx head screw with the tool pro- vided into the threaded insert in the inner clamp on each end of the crossbar.
A
B HS8028BC
FRONT
M A
X IM
U M
L O
A D
100 LB S
. E V
E N
LY D
IS T
R IB
U T
E D
A
B
C HS8026BC
8-21
Driving tips
CONTINUED
NOTE It may be necessary to start the inner clamp and end support at the center of the roof rail for easier installation, then move the crossbar forward. Use care not to cross-thread the screw in the insert if it has been removed. 5. Adjust the alignment of the crossbar on the roof rails, and if available, use a T-30 torx bit and torque wrench and tighten the T-30 torx head screws to 30 to 35 lbfin (3.4 to 4.0 Nm, 0.35 to 0.41 kgfm) of torque (or tighten securely with the torx wrench pro- vided).
Rear crossbar:
A) T-30 torx head screw B) Front arrow label C) 6 in (150 mm)
Install the rear crossbar in the same manner as the front crossbar.
NOTE The rear crossbar should be positioned 6 inches (150 mm) forward of the rear radius in the roof rail.
Do not carry cargo on the roof when the cross-
FRONT
A
B
C HS8027BC
8-22
Driving tips
bars are removed. Luggage on the roof will be thrown forward or backward in sudden stops or rapid accelerations, resulting in a dangerous road hazard.
NOTE Before each use of the roof crossbar, make sure the four T-30 crossbar clamp screws have been checked, and retightened if necessary to 30 to 35 lbfin (3.4 to 4.0 Nm, 0.35 to 0.41 kgfm), as out- lined in Step #5 above.
Trailer hitch (if equipped) The trailer hitch is designed to tow a Class 1 rated load. When you tow a trailer, follow the instructions in the next section Trailer towing.
Never exceed the maximum weight specified for the trailer hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight could cause an accident resulting in se- rious personal injuries. Permissible trailer weight changes depending on the situation. Re- fer to the next section Trailer towing for pos- sible recommendations and limitations.
Trailer brakes are required when the towing load exceeds 1,000 lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer has safety chains and that each chain will hold the trailers maximum gross weight. Towing trailers without safety chains could cre- ate a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage.
Be sure to check the hitch pin and safety pin for positive locking placement before towing a trailer. If the ball mount comes off the hitch re-
8-23
Driving tips
CONTINUED
ceiver, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic safety hazard.
Use only the ball mount supplied with this hitch. Use the hitch only as a weight carrying hitch. Do not use with any type of weight dis- tributing hitch.
Connecting a trailer 1. Remove the receiver cover from the hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball mount into the hitch receiver tube.
2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the hitch receiv-
er tube so that the pin passes through the ball mount.
3. Insert the safety pin securely into the hitch pin. 4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it does not come off the hitch receiver.
HS8011BA
HS8012BA
8-24
Driving tips
A) Hitch ball installation point B) Hooks for safety chains
5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate for the ball mount and your trailer. The hitch ball must be securely installed on the ball mount. 6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball. 7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with safety chains that will hold the trailers maximum gross weight. The chains should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping onto the ground in case it should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight-turn situations into ac- count; however, be careful not to let them drag on the
ground.
Do not connect safety chains to part of the ve- hicle other than the safety chain hooks.
Hitch harness connector
8. Connect the hitch wire harnesss black four-pin wire connector to the towing trailers wire harness 9. Confirm proper function of the hitch wire harness by individually activating the brake, right turn signal, left turn signal, stop, and parking lights on the trailer.
A B
HS8013BC
HS8015BA
8-25
Driving tips
CONTINUED
NOTE Always disconnect the trailer wire harness before launching or retrieving a watercraft.
When you do not tow a trailer Remove the ball mount from the hitch receiver tube
and insert the receiver cover onto the hitch receiver tube.
Place the dust cap over the fou-pin connector of the hitch wire harness to protect against possible damage.
Occasionally lubricate terminals of the four-pin con- nector using terminal grease.
Trailer towing Your vehicle is designed and intended to be used pri- marily as a passenger-carrying vehicle. Towing a trail- er puts additional loads on your vehicles engine, driv- etrain, brakes, tires and suspension and has an ad- verse effect on fuel economy. If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety and satis- faction depend upon proper use of correct equipment and cautious operation of your vehicle. Seek the ad- vice of your SUBARU dealer to assist you in purchas- ing a hitch and other necessary towing equipment ap- propriate for your vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the instructions on correct installation and use provid- ed by the trailer and other towing equipment manufac- turers. SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or ve- hicle damage that result from trailer towing equipment, or from any errors or omissions in the instructions ac- companying such equipment or for your failure to fol- low the proper instructions.
Warranties and maintenance SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehicle damage or malfunction caused by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance will be required due to the additional load. (Refer to Main-
8-26
Driving tips
tenance schedule under severe driving conditions in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.) Under no circumstances should a trailer be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new powertrain component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving.
Maximum load limits
Never exceed the maximum load limits ex- plained below. Exceeding the maximum load limits could cause personal injury and/or vehi- cle damage.
Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) total weight.
Before towing a trailer, check the trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load. Make sure the load and its distribution in your vehicle
and trailer are acceptable.
Total trailer weight
Total trailer weight
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo load) must never exceed the maximum weight shown below.
HS8016AA
8-27
Driving tips
CONTINUED
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Vehicle Weight
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the combined total of the weight of the vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment installed on your vehicle. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation. Determine the GVW each time before going on a trip by putting your vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.
Model Conditions Maximum to- tal trailer weight
MT models When towing a trailer with- out brakes.
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes.
2,400 lbs (1,087 kg)
AT models When towing a trailer with- out brakes.
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes.
2,400 lbs (1,087 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade continu- ously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an outside temperature of 104F (40C) or above.
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
US8508AA
8-28
Driving tips
Certification label
GVWR is shown on the certification plate located on the drivers side door jamb.
Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Gross Axle Weight
The total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must nev- er exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating passengers and luggage inside the vehicle. The front and rear GAWR are also shown on the certification plate. To check both GVWR and GAWR and to confirm that the total weight and weight distribution are within safe driving limits, you should have your vehicle and trailer weighed at a commercial weighing station.
HS8007BA
US8030AA
8-29
Driving tips
CONTINUED
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight distribution while driving.
Tongue load
Tongue load
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8 to 11 per- cent of the total trailer weight and does not exceed the maximum value of 200 lbs (90 kg).
A) Jack B) Bathroom scale
The tongue load can be weighed with a bathroom scale as shown in the illustration above. When weigh- ing the tongue load, be sure to position the towing cou- pler at the height at which it would be during actual towing, using a jack as shown.
HS8019AA
A B
US8031BC
8-30
Driving tips
F: Front of vehicle
The tongue load can be adjusted by proper distribution of the load in the trailer. Never load the trailer with more weight in the back than in the front; approximate- ly 60 percent of the trailer load should be in the front and approximately 40 percent in the rear. Also, distrib- ute the load as evenly as possible on both the left and right sides. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight distribution while driving.
If the trailer is loaded with more weight in the
back of trailers axle than in the front, the load is taken off the rear axle of the towing vehicle. This may cause the rear wheels to skid, espe- cially during braking or when vehicle speed is reduced during cornering, resulting in over- steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
Trailer hitches Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer hitch is recom- mended. A genuine SUBARU hitch is available from your SUBARU dealer. If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoidable, be sure the hitch is suited to your vehicle and trailer. Consult with a professional hitch supplier to assist you in choosing an appropriate hitch for your vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch manufacturers instructions for installation and use. Never use a hitch that mounts only to the rear bumper. The bumper is not designed to handle that type of load. For all types of hitches, regularly check that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are tight.
F
60% 40% 50% 50%
HS8021BB
8-31
Driving tips
CONTINUED
Never drill the frame or under-body of your ve- hicle to install a commercial trailer hitch. If you do, dangerous exhaust gas, water or mud may enter the passenger compartment through the drilled hole. Exhaust gas contains carbon mon- oxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. Also, drill- ing the frame or under-body of your vehicle could cause deterioration of strength of your vehicle and cause corrosion around the drilled hole.
Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, or other systems when installing a hitch or other trailer towing equipment.
Do not use axle-mounted hitches as they can cause damage to the axle housing, wheel bear- ings, wheels or tires.
Connecting a trailer Trailer brakes
If your trailers total weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs (453 kg), the trailer is re- quired to be equipped with its own brake system. Elec- tric brakes or surge brakes are recommended, and must be installed properly. Check that your trailers brakes conform with Federal, state/province and/or other applicable regulations. Your SUBARUs brake system is not designed to be tapped into the trailers hydraulic brake system. Please ask your SUBARU dealer and professional trailer supplier for more infor- mation about the trailers brake system.
Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) total weight.
Do not directly connect your trailers hydrau- lic brake system to the hydraulic brake system in your vehicle. Direct connection would cause the vehicles brake performance to deteriorate and could lead to an accident.
8-32
Driving tips
Trailer safety chains In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch ball should break or become disconnected, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic safety hazard. For safety, always connect the towing vehicle and trailer with trailer safety chains. Pass the chains cross- ing each other under the trailer tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping onto the ground in case the trailer tongue should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight-turn situations into account; however, be careful not to let them drag on the ground. For more information about the safety chain connec- tion, refer to the instructions for your hitch and trailer.
Always use safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. Towing a trailer without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage.
Side mirrors
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, check that the standard side mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without significant blind spots. If significant blind spots occur with the vehicles standard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that conform with Federal, state/ province and/or other applicable regulations.
Trailer lights Connection of trailer lights to your vehicles electrical system requires modifications to the vehicles lighting circuit to increase its capacity and accommodate wir- ing changes. To ensure the trailer lights are connected properly, please consult your SUBARU dealer. Check
US8506BA
8-33
Driving tips
CONTINUED
for proper operation of the turn signals, the brake lights and parking lights each time you hitch up.
Direct splicing or other improper connection of trailer lights may damage your vehicles electri- cal system and cause a malfunction of your ve- hicles lighting system.
Tires Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle are properly inflated to the pressure specified on the tire placard lo- cated on the drivers side center pillar.
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper infla- tion pressure should be in accordance with the trailer manufacturers specifications.
Trailer towing tips
Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) when towing a trailer in hilly country on hot days.
When towing a trailer, steering, stability, stopping distance and braking performance
will be different from normal operation. For safetys sake, you should employ extra caution when towing a trailer and you should never speed. You should also keep the following tips in mind:
Before starting out on a trip Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-hitch mount-
ing are in good condition. If any problems are appar- ent, do not tow the trailer.
Check that the vehicle sits horizontally with the trail- er attached. If the vehicle is tipped sharply up at the front and down at the rear, check the total trailer weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then con- firm that the load and its distribution are acceptable.
Check that the tire pressures are correct. Check that the vehicle and trailer are connected
properly. Confirm that the trailer tongue is connected properly to the hitch ball. the trailer lights connector is connected properly and trailers brake lights illuminate when the vehi- cles brake pedal is pressed, and that the trailers turn signal lights flash when the vehicles turn signal lever is operated. the safety chains are connected properly.
8-34
Driving tips
all cargo in the trailer is secured safety in position. the side mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without a significant blind spot. Sufficient time should be taken to learn the feel of
the vehicle/trailer combination before starting out on a trip. In an area free of traffic, practice turning, stopping and backing up.
Driving with a trailer You should allow for considerably more stopping
distance when towing a trailer. Avoid sudden braking because it may result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of control.
Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accelerations. If your vehicle has a manual transmission, always start out in first gear and release the clutch at moderate en- gine revolution.
Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and rapid lane changes.
Slow down before turning. Make a longer than nor- mal turning radius because the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.
Crosswinds will adversely affect the handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Crosswinds can be due to weather conditions or the passing of large trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel and slow down immediately but gradu-
ally. When passing other vehicles, considerable dis-
tance is required because of the added weight and length caused by attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
A) Left turn B) Right turn
Backing up with a trailer is difficult and takes prac- tice. When backing up with a trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly. When turning back, grip the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand and turn it to the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right for a right turn.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing the trailer and have repairs
A B
UG8035BC
8-35
Driving tips
CONTINUED
performed immediately by the nearest SUBARU deal- er.
Driving on grades Before going down a steep hill, slow down and shift
into lower gear (if necessary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the engine braking effect and prevent overheat- ing of your vehicles brakes. Do not make sudden downshifts.
When driving uphill in hot weather, the air condition- er may turn off automatically to protect the engine from overheating.
When driving uphill in hot weather, pay attention to the water temperature gauge pointer (for all vehicles) and AT OIL TEMP warning light (for AT vehicles) since the engine and transmission are relatively prone to overheating under these conditions. If the water tem- perature gauge pointer approaches the OVERHEAT zone or the AT OIL TEMP warning light illuminates, immediately switch off the air conditioner and stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place. Refer to the Engine overheating section in chapter 9, and Warning and indicator lights section in chapter 3.
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, avoid using the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on an uphill slope instead of using the parking brake or foot brake. That may cause the transmission fluid to over- heat. Also, if your vehicle is equipped with an automat-
ic transmission, avoid driving with the gear selector le- ver in D when towing a heavy trailer to prevent fluid overheating. A lower gear should be used.
Parking on a grade Always block the wheels under both vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. You should not park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a hill or slope cannot be avoided, you should take the following steps: 1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal down. 2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release the regular brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load. 4. Apply the regular brakes and then apply the park- ing brake; slowly release the regular brakes. 5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (manual transmission) or P (automatic transmission) and shut off the en- gine.
9-1
9
In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency ............................................ 9-2
Flat tires ......................................................... 9-3 Changing a flat tire ........................................... 9-3
Jump starting ................................................ 9-9 How to jump start ............................................. 9-10
Engine overheating ....................................... 9-12 If steam is coming from the engine
compartment .................................................. 9-12 If no steam is coming from the engine
compartment .................................................. 9-12 Towing ........................................................... 9-13
Towing and tie-down hooks ............................ 9-13 Using a flat-bed truck ....................................... 9-15 Towing with all wheels on the ground ............ 9-15
Rear gate if the rear gate cannot be unlocked ..................................................... 9-17
Moonroof if the moonroof cannot be closed ......................................................... 9-18
Maintenance tools ......................................... 9-19 Jack and jack handle ........................................ 9-19
9-2
In case of emergency
In case of emergencyIf you park your vehicle in case of an emergency
The hazard warning flasher should be used in day or night to warn other drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions. Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be activated regard- less of the ignition switch position. Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it off by pushing the switch again.
NOTE When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work.
HS3019AA
9-3
In case of emergency
CONTINUED
Flat tires If you have a flat tire while driving, never brake sud- denly; keep driving straight ahead while gradually re- ducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place.
Changing a flat tire
Do not jack up the vehicle on an incline or a loose road surface. The jack can come out of the jacking point or sink into the ground and this can result in a severe accident.
Use only the jack provided with your vehicle. The jack supplied with the vehicle is designed only for changing a tire. Never get under the ve- hicle while supporting the vehicle with this jack.
Always turn the engine off before raising the flat tire off the ground using the jack. Never swing or push the vehicle supported with the jack. The jack can come out of the jacking point due to a jolt and this can result in a severe acci- dent.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenever possible, then stop the engine. 2. Set the parking brake securely and shift a manual transmission vehicle in reverse or an automatic trans- mission vehicle in the P (Park) position. 3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and have ev- eryone get out of the vehicle.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire di- agonally opposite the flat tire.
HS9003BA
9-4
In case of emergency
A) Jack B) Jack handle C) Spare tire
5. Take out the spare tire, jack, and wheel nut wrench. The spare tire is stored under the floor of the cargo ar- ea.
To remove the spare tire: Open the lid and hang the hook provided on the under side of the lid on the rear edge of the roof to keep the lid open. Remove the storage bucket. Turn the attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take spare tire out.
A) Storage bucket B) Attaching bolt C) Spare tire
The jack is stored under the left side of the cargo floor.
A
C
B HS9005BC
A
B
C
HS9004BC
9-5
In case of emergency
CONTINUED
To take out the jack: First raise the cargo tie-down hook on the rear-left side of the cargo area and pull the tab to open the lid, turn the jack screw counterclockwise to loosen it, then re- move the jack.
To take out the jack handle: Open the rear-left and center lids in the cargo area by pulling their tabs.
HS9006BA HS9007BA
9-6
In case of emergency
6. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
7. Place the jack under the side sill at the front or rear
US9526BA HS9009BA
US9528BA
9-7
In case of emergency
CONTINUED
jack-up point closest to the flat tire. Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack head engag- es firmly into the jack-up point.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jackscrew, and turn the handle until the tire clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle higher than necessary. 9. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat tire.
10.Before putting the spare tire on, clean the mounting
US9527BA
HS9011BA
UB9544AA
9-8
In case of emergency
surface of the wheel and hub with a cloth. 11.Put on the spare tire. Replace the wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts when the spare tire is installed. This could cause the nuts to become loose and lead to an accident.
12.Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.
13.Use the wheel nut wrench to securely tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque, following the tight- ening order in the illustration. The torque for tightening the nuts is 58 to 72 lbfft (80 to 100 Nm, 8 to 10 kgfm). This torque is equivalent to applying about 88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50 kg) at the top of the wheel nut wrench. Never use your foot on the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension on the wrench because you may exceed the specified torque. Have the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest automo- tive service facility.
14.Store the flat tire in the spare tire compartment. Put the spacer and tighten the attaching bolt firmly. Also store the jack and wheel nut wrench in their stor-
3
4 1
2
5
US9526CB
HS9014BA
9-9
In case of emergency
CONTINUED
age locations.
Never place a tire or tire changing tools in the passenger compartment after changing wheels. In a sudden stop or collisions, loose equipment could strike occupants and cause injury. Store the tire and all tools in the proper place.
Jump starting
Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. Do not let it come in contact with the eyes, skin, clothing or the vehicle. If battery fluid gets on you, thoroughly flush the exposed area with water immediately. Get med- ical help if the fluid has entered your eyes. If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, imme- diately drink a large amount of milk or water, and obtain immediate medical help. Keep everyone including children away from the battery.
The gas generated by a battery explodes if a flame or spark is brought near it. Do not smoke or light a match while jump starting.
Never attempt jump starting if the discharged battery is frozen. It could cause the battery to burst or explode.
Whenever working on or around a battery, al- ways wear suitable eye protectors, and remove metal objects such as rings, bands or other metal jewelry.
Be sure the jumper cables and clamps on them do not have loose or missing insulation.
9-10
In case of emergency
Do not jump start unless cables in suitable con- dition are available.
A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is advisable.
When your vehicle does not start due to a run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle may be jump started by connecting your battery to another battery (called the booster battery) with jumper cables. Jump starting is dangerous if it done incorrectly. If you are unsure about the proper procedure for jump start- ing, consult a competent mechanic.
How to jump start 1. Make sure the booster battery is 12 volts and the negative terminal is grounded. 2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch. 3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories. 4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in the sequence illustrated.
9-11
In case of emergency
CONTINUED
A) Booster battery B) Engine lifting bracket
2 31 4
+ -
-
+
A
B
HS9015BC
1)Connect one jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal on the dis- charged battery. 2)Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) ter- minal of the booster battery. 3)Connect one end of the other cable to the negative () terminal of the booster battery. 4)Connect the other end of the ca- ble to the engine lifting bracket.
Make sure that the cables are not near any moving parts and that the cable clamps are not in contact with any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and run it at moderate speed. Then start the en- gine of the vehicle that has the dis- charged battery. 6. When finished, carefully discon- nect the cables in exactly the reverse order.
9-12
In case of emergency
Engine overheating
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has been shut off and has fully cooled down. When the engine is hot, the cool- ant is under pressure. Removing the cap while the engine is still hot could release a spray of boiling hot coolant, which could burn you very seriously.
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the road and stop the vehicle in a safe place.
If steam is coming from the engine compartment
Turn the engine off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down.
If no steam is coming from the engine compartment
1. Keep the engine running at idling speed. 2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine compart- ment.
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the fan is not turning, immediately turn the engine off and contact your authorized dealer for repair. 3. After the engine coolant temperature has dropped, turn off the engine. If the temperature gauge stays at the overheated zone, turn the engine off. 4. After the engine has fully cooled down, check the coolant level in the reserve tank. If the coolant level is below the LOW mark, add cool- ant up to the FULL mark. 5. If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, add cool- ant to the reserve tank. Then remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator with coolant.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap, then turn the cap counterclockwise slowly without pressing down until it stops. Release the pressure from the ra- diator. After the pressure has been fully released, re- move the cap by pressing down and turning it.
9-13
In case of emergency
CONTINUED
Towing If towing is necessary, it is best done by your SUBARU dealer or a commercial towing service. Observe the following procedures for safety.
Never tow AWD vehicles (both AT and MT) with the front wheels raised off the ground while the rear wheels are on the ground, or with the rear wheels raised off the ground while the front wheels are on the ground. This will cause the vehicle to spin away due to the operation or de-
terioration of the center differential.
Towing and tie-down hooks The towing hooks should be used only in an emergen- cy (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle from mud, sand or snow).
Front towing hook:
US9513BA
HS9017BA
9-14
In case of emergency
Rear towing hook:
To prevent deformation to the front bumper and the towing hook, do not apply excessive lateral load to the towing hooks.
Tie-down hooks:
A) Tie-down hooks B) Towing and tie-down hooks
US9515BA
A
B
B
A US9516BC
9-15
In case of emergency
CONTINUED
Use only the specified towing hooks and tie- down hooks. Never use suspension parts or other body parts for towing or tie-down purpos- es.
Never use the tie-down hook on the under- side of the vehicle closest to the muffler for towing purposes.
Using a flat-bed truck
This is the best way to transport your vehicle. Use the
following procedures to ensure safe transportation. 1. Shift the selector lever into the P position for au- tomatic transmission vehicles or 1st for manual transmission vehicles. 2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly. 3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier properly with safety chains. Each safety chain should be equally tightened and care must be taken not to pull the chains so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
Towing with all wheels on the ground
1. Check the transmission and differential oil levels and add oil to bring it to the upper level if necessary.
US9517AA
US9518AA
9-16
In case of emergency
2. Release the parking brake and put the transmis- sion in neutral. 3. The ignition switch should be in the ACC position while the vehicle is being towed. 4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to prevent dam- age to the vehicle.
Never turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position while the vehicle is being towed be- cause the steering wheel and the direction of the wheels will be locked.
Remember that the brake booster and power steering do not function when the engine is not running. Because the engine is turned off, it will take greater effort to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel.
If transmission failure occurs, transport your vehicle on a flat-bed truck.
Do not run the engine while being towed us- ing this method. Transmission damage could result if the vehicle is towed with the engine running.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, the traveling speed must be limited to less than 20 mph (30 km/h) and the traveling distance to less than 31 miles (50 km). For greater speeds and distances, transport your vehicle on a flat- bed truck.
9-17
In case of emergency
CONTINUED
Rear gate if the rear gate cannot be unlocked In the event that you cannot unlock the rear gate by operating the power door locking switches or the re- mote keyless entry system, you can unlock it from in- side the cargo area.
0
1. Remove the access cover at the bottom-center of the rear gate trim.
2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever behind the rear gate trim panel. 3. Unlock the rear gate by pressing the lever inside the trim upward. 4. Open the rear gate from outside by raising the rear gate handle.
HS9025BA
HS9026BA
9-18
In case of emergency
Moonroof if the moonroof cannot be closed If the moonroof cannot be closed with the moonroof switch, you can close the sunroof manually.
1. Remove the plug on the roof trim located to the rear of the moonroof by inserting the end of a flat-head screwdriver between the roof and plug and prying it off.
2. Insert a hex-headed wrench in the end of the motor shaft. To close the moonroof, turn the wrench counterclock- wise. Have your vehicle checked and repaired by an autho- rized SUBARU dealer.
HS9022CA
HS9022BA
9-19
In case of emergency
CONTINUED
Maintenance tools
Your vehicle is equipped with the following mainte- nance tools:
Screwdriver Wheel nut wrench Hex-head wrench (for vehicle with moonroof)
Jack and jack handle
The jack is stored under the left side of the cargo floor. US9522AA
HS9006BA
9-20
In case of emergency
The jack handle is stowed under the rear-left and cen- ter lids in the cargo area.
For how to use the jack, refer to the Flat tires section.
HS9007BA
10-1
10
Appearance care
Exterior care .................................................. 10-2 Washing ............................................................. 10-2 Waxing and polishing ....................................... 10-3 Cleaning aluminum wheels .............................. 10-3
Corrosion protection .................................... 10-4 Most common causes of corrosion ................ 10-4 To help prevent corrosion ............................... 10-5
Cleaning the interior ..................................... 10-6 Seat fabric ......................................................... 10-6 Leather seat materials ...................................... 10-6 Synthetic leather upholstery ........................... 10-6 Ashtray .............................................................. 10-7 Climate control panel, audio panel,
instrument panel, console panel, switches, combination meter, and other plastic surfaces .......................................................... 10-7
10-2
Appearance care
Appearance careExterior care
Washing The best way to preserve your vehicles beauty is fre- quent washing. Wash the vehicle at least once a month to avoid contamination by road grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of luke- warm or cold water. Do not wash the vehicle with hot water and in direct sunlight.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot and bird droppings should be washed off by using a light detergent, as re- quired. If you use a light detergent, make certain that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use strong soap or chemical detergents. All cleaning agents should be promptly flushed from the surface and not allowed to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the remaining water off with a chamois or soft cloth.
When washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result, the brake stopping dis- tance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
Do not wash the engine compartment and area adjacent to it. If water enters the engine air intake, electrical parts or the power steering flu- id reservoir, it will cause engine trouble or faulty power steering respectively.
NOTE When having your vehicle washed in an automatic car wash, make sure beforehand that the car wash is of suitable type. Automatic car wash brushes or other equipment may damage the rear wiper and roof spoiler (if equipped).
Washing the underbody Chemicals, salts and gravel used for deicing road sur- faces are extremely corrosive, accelerating the corro- sion of underbody components, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders, and suspension. Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water at frequent inter- vals to reduce the harmful effects of such agents.
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody components may accelerate their corrosion. After driving off-road or muddy or sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off the underbody.
10-3
Appearance care
CONTINUED
Carefully flush the suspension and axle parts, as they are particularly prone to mud and sand buildup. Do not use a sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.
NOTE Be careful not to damage brake hoses, sensor har- nesses, and other parts when washing suspen- sion components.
Using a warm water washer Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm) or more be-
tween the washer nozzle and the vehicle. Do not wash the same area continuously. If a stain will not come out easily, wash by hand.
Some warm water washers are of the high tempera- ture, high pressure type, and they can damage or de- form the resin parts such as mouldings, or cause wa- ter to leak into the vehicle.
Waxing and polishing Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing and polishing. Use a good quality polish and wax and apply them ac- cording to the manufacturers instructions. Wax or pol- ish when the painted surface is cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of wax on a painted surface
leads to loss of the original luster and also quickens the deterioration of the surface. It is recommended that a coat of wax be applied at least once a month, or whenever the surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has diminished to the point where the luster or tone cannot be restored, lightly polish the surface with a fine-grained com- pound. Never polish just the affected area, but include the surrounding area as well. Always polish in only one direction. A No. 2000 grain compound is recom- mended. Never use a coarse-grained compound. Coarser grained compounds have a smaller grain-size number and could damage the paint. After polishing with a compound, coat with wax to restore the original luster. Frequent polishing with a compound or an in- correct polishing technique will result in removing the paint layer and exposing the undercoat. When in doubt, it is always best to contact your SUBARU deal- er or an auto paint specialist.
NOTE Be careful not to block the windshield washer noz- zles with wax when waxing the vehicle.
Cleaning aluminum wheels Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels clean of any
kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on too long, it may
10-4
Appearance care
be difficult to clean off. Do not use soap containing grit to clean the wheels.
Be sure to use a neutral cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly with water. Do not clean the wheels with a stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed washing device.
Clean the vehicle (including the aluminum wheels) with water as soon as possible when it has been splashed with sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or driven on roads treated with salt or other agents.
Corrosion protection Your SUBARU has been designed and built to resist corrosion. Special materials and protective finishes have been used on most parts of the vehicle to help maintain fine appearance, strength, and reliable oper- ation.
Most common causes of corrosion The most common causes of corrosion are: 1. The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and de- bris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. 2. Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle when: 1. It is exposed to road salt or dust control chemicals, or used in coastal areas where there is more salt in the air, or in areas where there is considerable industrial pollution. 2. It is driven in areas of high humidity, especially when temperatures range just above freezing. 3. Dampness in certain parts of the vehicle remains for a long time, even though other parts of the vehicle may be dry. 4. High temperatures will cause corrosion to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry quickly due to lack of
10-5
Appearance care
CONTINUED
proper ventilation.
To help prevent corrosion Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent corrosion of the body and suspension components. Also, wash the ve- hicle promptly after driving on any of the following sur- faces:
roads that have been salted to prevent them from freezing in winter
mud, sand, or gravel coastal roads
After the winter has ended, it is recommended that the underbody be given a very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the condition of underbody components, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, suspension, steer- ing system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of them are found to be rusted, they should be given an appropri- ate rust prevention treatment or should be replaced. Contact your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind of maintenance and treatment if you need assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as soon as you find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water and dirt ac-
cumulation under the floor mats because that could cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats to make sure the area is dry. Keep your garage dry. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. In such a garage, cor- rosion can be caused by dampness. If you wash the vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into the garage when wet or covered with snow, that can cause damp- ness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather and/or in ar- eas where road salts and other corrosive materials are used, the door hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood latch should be inspected and lubricated period- ically.
10-6
Appearance care
Cleaning the interior Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the air conditioner pan- el, audio equipment, instrument panel, center console, combination meter panel, and switches. (Do not use organic solvents.)
Seat fabric Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the fabric or hard to re- move with a vacuum cleaner, use a soft blush then vacuum it. Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a commercially- available fabric cleaner. Use the cleaner on a hidden place and make sure it does not affect the fabric ad- versely. Use the cleaner according to its instructions.
Leather seat materials The leather used by SUBARU is a high quality natural product which will retain its distinctive appearance and feel for many years with proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the surface can cause the material to become brittle and to wear pre- maturely. Regular cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber cloth should be performed monthly, taking care not to soak the leather or allow water to penetrate the stitched seams. A mild detergent suitable for cleaning woolen fabrics may be used to remove difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If your SUBARU is to be parked for a long time in bright sun- light, it is recommended that the seats and headrests be covered, or the windows shaded, to prevent fading or shrinkage. Minor surface blemishes or bald patches may be treat- ed with a commercial leather spray lacquer. You will discover that each leather seat section will develop soft folds or wrinkles, which is characteristic of genu- ine leather.
Synthetic leather upholstery The synthetic leather material used on the SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap or detergent and wa- ter, after first vacuuming or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic leather materials may be used when necessary.
10-7
Appearance care
CONTINUED
NOTE Strong cleaning agents such as solvents, paint thinners, window cleaner or gasoline must never be used on leather or synthetic interior materials.
Ashtray
Particles of ash and tobacco will accumulate around the hinges of the ashtrays inner lid. Clean them off us- ing a toothbrush or other narrow-ended implement.
Climate control panel, audio panel, in- strument panel, console panel, switch- es, combination meter, and other plas- tic surfaces
Gently wipe away contamination using a clean, soft cloth moistened with cold or lukewarm water.
NOTE Do not use organic solvents such as paint thin- ners or gasoline, or strong cleaning agents that contain those solvents.
US6060BA
11-1
11
Maintenance and service
Maintenance schedule ................................. 11-3 Maintenance precautions ............................ 11-3
Before checking or servicing in the engine compartment .................................................. 11-4
When you do checking or servicing in the engine compartment while the engine is running ............................................................ 11-5
Engine hood .................................................. 11-5 Engine compartment overview ................... 11-8
Non-turbo models ............................................. 11-8 Turbo models .................................................... 11-9
Engine oil ...................................................... 11-10 Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-10 Changing the oil and oil filter .......................... 11-11 Recommended grade and viscosity ................ 11-13 Recommended grade and viscosity under
severe driving conditions .............................. 11-15 Synthetic oil ....................................................... 11-15
Cooling system ............................................. 11-16 Cooling fan, hose and connections ................ 11-16 Engine coolant .................................................. 11-17
Air cleaner element ...................................... 11-21 Replacing the air cleaner element ................... 11-21
Spark plugs ................................................... 11-25 Recommended spark plugs ............................. 11-26
Drive belts ..................................................... 11-26 Manual transmission oil ............................... 11-27
Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-27 Recommended grade and viscosity ................ 11-28
Automatic transmission fluid ...................... 11-29 Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-29 Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-31
Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles) ...... 11-31 Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-31 Recommended grade and viscosity ............... 11-32
Rear differential gear oil ............................... 11-33 Checking the gear oil level .............................. 11-33 Recommended grade and viscosity ............... 11-34
Power steering fluid ...................................... 11-34 Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-34 Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-35
Brake fluid ..................................................... 11-36 Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-36 Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-36
Clutch fluid (MT vehicles) ............................ 11-37 Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-37 Recommended clutch fluid .............................. 11-37
Brake booster ................................................ 11-38 Brake pedal .................................................... 11-38
Checking the brake pedal free play ................ 11-38 Checking the brake pedal reserve distance ... 11-39
Clutch pedal (MT vehicles) ........................... 11-39 Checking the clutch function .......................... 11-39 Checking the clutch pedal free play ............... 11-40
Hill holder (MT vehicles if equipped) ....... 11-40 Replacement of brake pad and lining ......... 11-41
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings .... 11-41 Parking brake stroke .................................... 11-42
11-2
Maintenance and service
Tires and wheels .......................................... 11-43 Types of tires .................................................... 11-43 Tire inspection .................................................. 11-43 Tire pressures and wear .................................. 11-44 Wheel balance ................................................... 11-46 Wear indicators ................................................. 11-47 Tire rotation ....................................................... 11-48 Tire replacement ............................................... 11-48 Wheel replacement ........................................... 11-49
Aluminum wheels (if equipped) .................. 11-50 Windshield washer fluid .............................. 11-50 Replacement of wiper blades ...................... 11-51
Windshield wiper blades .................................. 11-52 Rear window wiper blade ................................. 11-54
Battery ........................................................... 11-58 Fuses ............................................................. 11-60 Main fuse ....................................................... 11-62 Installation of accessories .......................... 11-63 Replacing bulbs ............................................ 11-63
Headlight ........................................................... 11-64 Front turn signal, side marker light and
parking lights ................................................. 11-66 Front fog light ................................................... 11-70 Rear combination lights ................................... 11-70 License plate light ............................................ 11-72 Dome light, map light and cargo area light .... 11-72 High mount stop light ...................................... 11-74
11-3
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
Maintenance and serviceMaintenance schedule The scheduled maintenance items required to be ser- viced at regular intervals are shown in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.
For details of your maintenance schedule, read the separate Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.
Maintenance precautions When maintenance and service are required, it is rec- ommended that all work be done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service by yourself, you should familiarize yourself with the information provided in this section on general maintenance and service for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could cause improper or unsafe vehicle operation. Any problems caused by improper maintenance and service performed by you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dy- namometer or similar apparatus. Attempting to do so will result in transmission damage and in uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby.
Always select a safe area when performing maintenance on your vehicle.
Always be very careful to avoid injury when working on the vehicle. Remember that some of
11-4
Maintenance and service
the materials in the vehicle may be hazardous if improperly used or handled, for example, bat- tery acid.
Your vehicle should only be serviced by per- sons fully competent to do so. Serious person- al injury may result to persons not experienced in servicing vehicles.
Always use the proper tools and make certain that they are well maintained.
Never get under the vehicle supported only by a jack. Always use a safety stands to sup- port the vehicle.
Never keep the engine running in a poorly ventilated area, such as a garage or other closed areas.
Do not smoke or allow open flames around the fuel or battery. This will cause a fire.
Because the fuel system is under pressure, replacement of the fuel filter should be per- formed only by your SUBARU dealer.
Wear adequate eye protection to guard against getting oil or fluids in your eyes. If something does get in your eyes, thoroughly wash them out with clean water.
Do not tamper with the wiring of the SRS air- bag system or seatbelt pretensioner system, or attempt to take its connectors apart, as that
may activate the system or it can render it inop- erative. The wiring and connectors of these systems are yellow for easy identification. NEV- ER use a circuit tester for these wiring. If your SRS airbag or seatbelt pretensioner needs service, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer.
Before checking or servicing in the en- gine compartment
Always stop the engine and set the parking brake firmly to prevent the vehicle from mov- ing.
Always let the engine cool down. Engine parts become very hot when the engine is run- ning and remain hot for some time after the en- gine is stopped.
Do not spill engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid or any other fluid on hot engine compo- nents. This may cause a fire.
Always remove the key from the ignition switch. When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the cooling fan may operate suddenly
11-5
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
even when the engine is stopped.
When you do checking or servicing in the engine compartment while the en- gine is running
A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any other mov- ing engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is advisable.
Engine hood 0
To open the hood: 1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the windshield, re- turn them to their original positions. 2. Pull the hood release knob under the instrument panel.
HSB014BA
11-6
Maintenance and service
3. Release the secondary hood release located under the front grille by moving the lever toward the left.
Lift up the hood, release the hood prop from its retain- er and put the end of the hood prop into the slot in the hood.
To close the hood: 1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its re- tainer. 2. Lower the hood until it approaches about 12 in (30 cm) from the closed position and let it drop.
After closing the hood, be sure the hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it from a slightly
HSB015BA HSB016BA
11-7
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
higher position. Do not push the hood forcibly to close it. It could deform the metal.
Always check that the hood is properly locked before you start driving. If it is not, it might fly open while the vehicle is moving and block your view, which may cause an accident and serious bodily injury.
11-8
Maintenance and service
Engine compartment overview
Non-turbo models
13 12 11 10 9 8
2 3 54 61 7
USB102BB
1) Air cleaner element (page 11- 21)
2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT) (page 11-27) or Dif- ferential gear oil level gauge (AT) (page 11-31)
3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11- 37)
4) Automatic transmission fluid lev- el gauge (page 11-29)
5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11- 36)
6) Windshield washer tank (page 11-50)
7) Fuse box (page 11-60) 8) Battery (page 11-58) 9) Engine coolant reservoir (page
11-16) 10) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-10) 11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-
10) 12) Radiator cap (page 11-16) 13) Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-34)
11-9
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
Turbo models
12 3 54 6 7
8910111213 USB101BB
1) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT) (page 11-27) or Dif- ferential gear oil level gauge (AT) (page 11-31)
2) Air cleaner element (page 11- 21)
3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11- 37)
4) Automatic transmission fluid lev- el gauge (page 11-29)
5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11- 36)
6) Windshield washer tank (page 11-50)
7) Fuse box (page 11-60) 8) Battery (page 11-58) 9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-10) 10) Engine coolant reservoir (page
11-16) 11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-
10) 12) Radiator cap (page 11-16) 13) Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-34)
11-10
Maintenance and service
Engine oil
Checking the oil level Check the engine oil level at each fuel stop. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the en- gine.
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it again. 3. Be sure the dipstick is correctly inserted until it stops with the graphic symbol on its top ap- pearing as shown in the illustration.
A) Notch B) Upper level C) Lower level
4. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it. If it is below the lower level, add oil to bring the level up to the upper level.
Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
Be careful not to spill engine oil when adding it. If oil touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause
HSB018BA
A
B
C
UGB082BC
11-11
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire.
If you check the oil level just after stopping the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan before checking the level. Just after driving or while the engine is warm, the en- gine oil level reading may be in a range between the upper level and the notch mark. This is caused by ther- mal expansion of the engine oil. To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not add any additional oil above the upper level when the engine is cold.
Changing the oil and oil filter Change the oil and oil filter according to the mainte- nance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. The engine oil and oil filter must be changed more fre- quently than listed in the maintenance schedule when driving on dusty roads, when short trips are frequently made, when towing a trailer, or when driving in ex- tremely cold whether.
1. Warm up the engine by letting the engine idle for about 10 minutes to ease draining the engine oil. 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the en-
gine. 3. Remove the oil filler cap.
4. Open the access cover by removing the six clips and turning the access cover counterclockwise. The drain plug will be exposed.
HSB025BA
11-12
Maintenance and service
5. Drain out the engine oil by removing the drain plug while the engine is still warm. The used oil should be drained into an appropriate container and disposed of properly.
Be careful not to burn yourself with hot engine oil.
6. Wipe the seating surface of the drain plug with a clean cloth and tighten it securely with a new sealing washer after the oil has completely drained out.
7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter wrench. 8. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a thin coat of engine oil to the seal. 9. Clean the rubber seal seating area of the bottom of engine and install the oil filter by hand turning. Be careful not to twist or damage the seal. 10.Tighten the oil filter by the amount indicated in the following table after the seal makes contact with the bottom of engine.
HSB020DA HSB020EA
11-13
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
Never over tighten the oil filter because that can result in an oil leak.
11.Close the access cover by turning it clockwise and reinstall the six clips in their original positions. 12.Pour engine oil through the filler neck.
Oil quantity (guideline): 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
The oil quantity indicated above is only a guideline. The necessary quantity of oil depends on the quantity of oil that has been drained. The quantity of drained oil differs slightly depending on the temperature of the oil and the time the oil is left flowing out. After pouring oil into the engine, therefore, you must use the dipstick to confirm that the level is correct. 13.Start the engine and make sure that no oil leaks ap-
pear around the filters rubber seal. 14.Run the engine until it reaches the normal operat- ing temperature. Then stop the engine and wait a few minutes to allow the oil drain back. Check the oil level again and if necessary, add more engine oil.
Recommended grade and viscosity
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-3, which can be identified with the new API certification mark (Starburst mark) or API classification SL with the words ENERGY CONSERVING (if you cannot obtain the oil with SL grade, you may use SJ grade ENERGY CON- SERVING oil).
These recommended oil grades can be identified by looking for either or both of the following marks dis- played on the oil container.
Oil filter color Part number Amount of rotation
Black 15208AA080 1 rotation
White 15208AA09A 2/3 3/4 rotation
11-14
Maintenance and service
API Service label A) Indicates the oil quality by API designations B) Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade C) Indicates that the oil has fuel saving capabilities
New API Certification Mark (Starburst Mark)
In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and vis- cosity, as well as one that will add to fuel economy. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures. When adding oil, different brands may be used togeth- er as long as they are the same API classification and SAE viscosity as those recommended by SUBARU.
API SERVICE SL
E N
ERGY CONSERVIN G
SAE 5W-30
A
B
C HSB022BC
AM ER
IC AN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE
CERTIFIED HSB023AA
11-15
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
SAE viscosity number and applicable temperature *: 5W-30 is preferred.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is re- quired to properly lubricate the engine.
Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
Recommended grade and viscosity under severe driving conditions
If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in areas with very high temperatures, or used for heavy-duty applica- tions such as towing a trailer, use of oil with the follow- ing grade and viscosities is recommended.
API classification SL (or SJ): SAE viscosity No.:
30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50
Synthetic oil You can use synthetic engine oil that meets the same requirements given for conventional engine oil. When using synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same clas- sification, viscosity and grade shown in this owners manual, and must follow the oil and filter changing in- tervals shown in the maintenance schedule.
5W-30*
10W-30, 10W-40
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
-20 0 6020 80 10040
UGB084BA
11-16
Maintenance and service
Cooling system
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has been shut off and has cooled down completely. Since the coolant is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is re- moved.
The cooling system has been filled at the facto- ry with a high quality, corrosion-inhibiting, year-around coolant which provides protection against freezing down to 33F (36C). For adding, use genuine SUBARU coolant or an equivalent: a mixture of 50% soft water and 50% ethylene-glycol basis coolant. Use of improper coolants may result in corrosion in the cooling system. It is important to maintain protection against freezing and corrosion, even if freezing temperatures are not expected. Never mix dif- ferent kinds of coolant.
Cooling fan, hose and connections Your vehicle employs an electric cooling fan which is thermostatically controlled to operate when the engine coolant reaches a specific temperature. If the radiator cooling fan does not operate even when the engine coolant temperature gauge exceeds the normal operating range, the cooling fan circuit may be defective. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary. If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling system checked by your SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is necessary, there may be a leak in the engine cooling system. It is recom- mended that the cooling system and connections be checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
11-17
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
Engine coolant Checking the coolant level
A) FULL level mark B) LOW level mark
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop. 1. Check the coolant level on the outside of the reser- voir while the engine is cool. 2. If the level is close to or lower than the LOW level mark, add coolant up to the FULL level mark. If the reserve tank is empty, remove the radiator cap and re- fill as required.
A) Rubber gaskets
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the radiator, re- install the caps and check that the rubber gaskets in- side the radiator cap are in the proper position.
Be careful not to spill engine coolant when adding it. If coolant touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire.
Do not splash the engine coolant over paint- ed parts. The alcohol contained in the engine
HSB018CC
A
B
A
HSB026BC
11-18
Maintenance and service
coolant may damage the paint surface.
Changing the coolant
A) Drain plug
Always add genuine Subaru cooling system condition- er whenever the coolant is replaced. Change the engine coolant and add genuine Subaru cooling system conditioner using the following proce- dures according to the maintenance schedule. 1. Remove the under cover. 2. Place a proper container under the drain plug and loosen the drain plug.
3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the coolant from the radiator. Then drain the coolant from the reserve tank. Tighten the drain plug securely.
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has been shut off and has cooled down completely. Since the coolant is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is re- moved.
4. Install the under cover.
A HSB027BC
11-19
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
Non-turbo models A) Filler neck B) Fill up to this level
Turbo models A) Filler neck B) Fill up to this level
5. Slowly pour the coolant and fill up to just below the filler neck, allowing enough room to add genuine Subaru cooling system conditioner in the radiator. Add genuine Subaru cooling system conditioner until the coolant level reaches the filler neck. Do not pour the coolant too quickly, as this may lead to insufficient air bleeding and trapped air in the system.
A
B
HSB028BC
A
B USB518BC
11-20
Maintenance and service
Guideline of coolant quantity (including coolant in reservoir tank):
Non-turbo models: MT. 7.3 US qt (6.9 liters, 6.1 Imp qt) AT. 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt)
Turbo models: MT. 7.8 US qt (7.4 liters, 6.5 Imp qt) AT. 7.7 US qt (7.3 liters, 6.4 Imp qt)
A) FULL level mark B) LOW level mark
6. Pour the coolant and fill to the reservoir tanks FULL level mark.
Be careful not to spill engine coolant when adding it. If coolant touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire.
Do not splash the engine coolant over paint- ed parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface.
A) Rubber gaskets
7. Put the radiator cap back on and tighten firmly. At this time, make sure that the rubber gasket in the radi-
HSB018CC
A
B
A
HSB026BC
11-21
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
ator cap is correctly in place. 8. Start and run the engine for more than five minutes at 2,000 to 3,000 rpm. 9. Stop the engine and wait until the coolant cools down (122 to 140F [50 to 60C]). If there is any loss of coolant, add coolant to the radiators filler neck and to the reserve tanks FULL level. 10.Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap back on and tighten firmly.
Air cleaner element The air cleaner element functions as a filter screen. When the element is perforated or removed, engine wear will be excessive and engine life shortened.
The air cleaner element is a viscous type. It is unnec- essary to clean or wash the element.
Do not operate the engine with the air cleaner element removed. The air cleaner element not only filters intake air but also stops flames if the engine backfires. If the air cleaner element is not installed when the engine backfires, you could be burned.
Replacing the air cleaner element Replace the air cleaner element according to the maintenance schedule in the Warranty and Mainte- nance Booklet. Under extremely dusty conditions, re- place it more frequently. It is recommended that you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
11-22
Maintenance and service
Non-turbo models
1. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air cleaner case cover.
2. Push the air cleaner case cover in the direction of the arrow shown in the drawing.
UGB092BA
UGB104BA
11-23
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
A) Air cleaner case cover B) Air cleaner element
3. Open the air cleaner case cover and remove the air cleaner element. 4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner cover and case with a damp cloth and install a new air cleaner ele- ment.
5. To install the air cleaner case cover, insert the three projections on the air cleaner case into the slits on the air cleaner case cover and then snap the two clamps on the air cleaner case cover.
A
B UGB093BC UGB094BA
11-24
Maintenance and service
Turbo models
1. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air cleaner case cover.
A) Air cleaner case cover B) Air cleaner element
2. Open the air cleaner case cover and remove the air cleaner element. 3. Clean the inside of the air cleaner cover and case with a damp cloth and install a new air cleaner ele- ment.
USB521BA
B
A
USB522BC
11-25
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
4. To install the air cleaner case cover, insert the two projections on the air cleaner case cover into the slits on the air cleaner case and then snap the two clamps on the air cleaner case cover.
Spark plugs
It may be difficult to replace the spark plugs. It is rec- ommended that you have the spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced according to the maintenance schedule in the Warranty and Mainte- nance Booklet.
When disconnecting the spark plug cables, always grasp the spark plug cap, not the ca-
USB523BA
HSB032BA
11-26
Maintenance and service
bles. Make sure the cables are replaced in the cor-
rect order.
Recommended spark plugs
Non-turbo models: FR5AP-11 (NGK)
Turbo models: ILFR6B (NGK)
Drive belts
A) Power steering pump pulley B) Air conditioner compressor pulley C) Crank pulley
The alternator, power steering pump, and air condi- tioner compressor depend on drive belts. Satisfactory performance requires that belt tension be correct.
To check belt tension, place a straightedge (ruler) across two adjacent pulleys and apply a force of 22 lbs (98 N, 10 kg) midway between the pulleys by using a spring scale. Belt deflection should be the amount specified. If a belt is loose, cracked, or worn, contact
B
C
a b
A
HSB033BC
11-27
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
your SUBARU dealer. in (mm)
Manual transmission oil
Checking the oil level
Non-turbo models: A) Yellow handle
Deflection
New belt Used belt
a 0.28 0.35 (7.0 9.0) 0.35 0.43 (9.0 11.0)
b 0.30 0.33 (7.5 8.5) 0.35 0.40 (9.0 10.0)
HSB018DC
A
11-28
Maintenance and service
Turbo models
Check the oil level monthly. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the en- gine. 2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it again.
A) Upper level B) Lower level
3. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it. If it is below the lower level, add oil through the dip- stick hole to bring the level up to the upper level.
Recommended grade and viscosity Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and addi- tives. Never use different brands together.
Oil grade: API classification GL-5
HSB018LA
L F F
L
A
B
A
B
USB526BC
11-29
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature
Automatic transmission fluid
Checking the fluid level The automatic transmission fluid expands largely as its temperature rises; the fluid level differs according to fluid temperature. Therefore, there are two different scales for checking the level of hot fluid and cold fluid on the dipstick.
Though the fluid level can be checked without warm- ing up the fluid on the COLD range, we recommend checking the fluid level when the fluid is at operating temperature.
Checking the fluid level when the fluid is hot Check the fluid level monthly. 1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise the temper- ature of the transmission fluid up to normal operating temperature; 154 to 176F (70 to 80C) is normal. 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the park- ing brake. 3. First shift the selector lever in each position. Then shift it in the P position, and run the engine at idling speed.
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
-20 0 6020
80W
75W/90
80 10040
85W
90
HSB036BA
11-30
Maintenance and service
A) Yellow handle A) HOT range B) COLD range C) Upper level D) Lower level
4. Pull out the dipstick and check the fluid level on the gauge. If it is below the lower level on the HOT range, add the recommended automatic transmission fluid up to the upper level.
Checking the fluid level when the fluid is cold When the fluid level has to be checked without time to warm up the automatic transmission, check to see that the fluid level is between the lower level and upper lev- el on the COLD range. If it is below that range, add
HSB018MC
A
L F
L F
C
D
C
D
B
A
HGB061BC
11-31
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
fluid up to the upper level. Be careful not to overfill.
Recommended fluid
Dexron III Type Automatic Transmission Fluid
Front differential gear oil (AT vehi- cles)
Checking the oil level
A) Yellow handle
Check the differential oil level monthly. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the en- gine. 2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it again.
HSB018FC
A
11-32
Maintenance and service
A) Upper level B) Lower level
3. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it. If it is below the lower level, add oil to bring the level up to the upper level.
Recommended grade and viscosity Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and addi- tives. Never use different brands together.
Oil grade: API classification GL-5
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature
L F
A
B
HSB040BC
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
-20 0 6020
80W
75W/90
80 10040
85W
90
HSB036BA
11-33
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
Rear differential gear oil
Checking the gear oil level Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear differential protector. The differential protector provides protec- tion to the rear differential assembly during off-road use. Removal of the rear differential protector is not re- quired when checking the oil level.
A) Filler plug B) Drain plug
A) Filler hole B) Drain hole C) Oil level
Remove the plug from the filler hole and check the oil level. The oil level should be kept even with the bottom of the filler hole. If the oil level is below the bottom edge of the hole, add oil through the filler hole to raise the level.
If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be an oil leak. If you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU deal-
B
A
HSB042BC
C A
B HSB043BC
11-34
Maintenance and service
er.
Recommended grade and viscosity Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and addi- tives. Never use different brands together.
Oil grade: API classification GL-5
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature
Power steering fluid
Checking the fluid level
A) Reservoir tank
The power steering fluid expands greatly as its tem- perature rises; the fluid level differs according to fluid temperature. Therefore, the reservoir tank has two dif- ferent checking ranges for hot and cold fluids.
Check the power steering fluid level monthly. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and stop the en- gine.
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
-20 0 6020
80W
75W/90
80 10040
85W
90
HSB036BA
A
HSB044BC
11-35
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
A) Specified range
2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir tank. When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has been run: Check that the oil level is between HOT MIN and HOT MAX on the surface of the reservoir tank. When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is run: Check that the oil level is between COLD MIN and COLD MAX on the surface of the reservoir tank. 3. If the fluid level is lower than the applicable MIN line, add the recommended fluid as necessary to bring the level between the MIN and MAX line.
If the fluid level is extreme low, it may indicate possible leakage. Consult your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion.
Be careful not to burn yourself because the flu- id may be hot.
When power steering fluid is being added, use only clean fluid, and be careful not to allow any dirt into the tank. And never use different brands together.
Avoid spilling fluid when adding it in the tank.
Recommended fluid
Dexron III Type Automatic Transmission Fluid
A A
HSB045BC
11-36
Maintenance and service
Brake fluid
Checking the fluid level
A) MAX level mark B) MIN level mark
Check the fluid level monthly. Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If the level is below MIN, add the recommended brake fluid to MAX. Use only brake fluid from a sealed container.
Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed moisture can cause a dangerous loss of braking performance.
If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer.
Never use different brands of brake fluid to- gether.
When adding brake fluid, be careful not to al- low any dirt into the reservoir.
Never splash the brake fluid over painted sur- faces or rubber parts. Alcohol contained in the brake fluid may damage them.
Recommended brake fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid
MAX
MIN
HSB018GC
A
B
11-37
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
Clutch fluid (MT vehicles)
Checking the fluid level
A) MAX level mark B) MIN level mark
Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If the level is below MIN level mark, add the recom- mended clutch fluid to MAX level mark. Use only clutch fluid from a sealed container.
Clutch fluid absorbs moisture from the air.
Any absorbed moisture can cause improper clutch operation.
If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer.
Never use different brands of clutch fluid to- gether.
When clutch fluid is added, be careful not to allow any dirt into the tank.
Recommended clutch fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid
B A
HSB018NC
11-38
Maintenance and service
Brake booster If the brake booster does not operate as described be- low, have it checked by your SUBARU dealer. 1. With the engine off, depress the brake pedal sever- al times, applying the same pedal force each time. The distance the pedal travels should not vary. 2. With the brake pedal depressed, start the engine. The pedal should move slightly down to the floor. 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine and keep the pedal depressed for 30 seconds. The pedal height should not change. 4. Start the engine again and run for about one minute then turn it off. Depress the brake pedal several times to check the brake booster. Brake booster operates properly if the pedal stroke decreases with each de- pression.
Brake pedal Check the brake pedal free play and reserve distance according to the maintenance schedule in the War- ranty and Maintenance Booklet.
Checking the brake pedal free play
A) 0.04 0.12 in (1.0 3.0 mm)
Stop the engine and firmly depress the brake pedal several times. Lightly press the brake pedal down with one finger to check the free play with a force of less than 2 lbs (10 N, 1 kg). If the free play is not within proper specification, con-
A
HSB049BC
11-39
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
tact your SUBARU dealer.
Checking the brake pedal reserve dis- tance
A) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)
Depress the pedal with a force of approximately 66 lbs (294 N, 30 kg) and measure the distance between the upper surface of the pedal pad and the floor. When the measurement is smaller than the specifica- tion, or when the pedal does not operate smoothly, contact with your SUBARU dealer.
Clutch pedal (MT vehicles) Check the clutch pedal free play and reserve distance according to the maintenance schedule in the War- ranty and Maintenance Booklet.
Checking the clutch function Check the clutch engagement and disengagement. 1. With the engine idling, check that there are no ab- normal noises when the clutch pedal is depressed, and that shifting into 1st or reverse feels smooth. 2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal slowly to check that the engine and transmission smoothly cou- ple without any sign of slippage.
A
HSB050BC
11-40
Maintenance and service
Checking the clutch pedal free play
A) 0.16 0.51 in (4.0 13.0 mm)
Lightly press the clutch pedal down with your finger until you feel resistance, and check the free play. If the free play is not within proper specification, con- tact your SUBARU dealer.
Hill holder (MT vehicles if equipped) Ensure that the hill holder operates properly under the following circumstances: 1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by depressing the brake pedal and clutch pedal, with the engine run- ning. 2. Make sure that the vehicle does not move back- ward even after the brake pedal is released. 3. Then make sure the vehicle starts climbing the grade by following the normal starting procedures.
If the hill holder does not operate as described above, contact with your SUBARU dealer.
A
HSB049BC
11-41
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
Replacement of brake pad and lining
The right front disc brake and the right rear disc brake have audible wear indicators on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear close to their service limit, the wear indicator makes a very audible scraping noise when the brake pedal is applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time you apply the brake pedal, have the brake pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
If you continue to drive despite the scraping noise from the audible brake pad wear indica- tor, it will result in the need for costly brake ro- tor repair or replacement.
Breaking-in of new brake pads and lin- ings
When replacing the brake pad or lining, use only gen- uine SUBARU parts. After replacement, the new parts must be broken in as follows:
Brake pad and lining While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more times.
Parking brake lining 1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of about 22 mph (35 km/h). 2. With the parking brake release button pushed in, pull the parking brake lever SLOWLY and GENTLY. (Pulling with a force of approximately 33 lbs [147 N, 15 kg].) 3. Drive the vehicle for about 220 yards (200 meters)
HS7012BA
11-42
Maintenance and service
in this condition. 4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking brake to cool down. Repeat this procedure. 5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the parking brake stroke is out of the specified range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut located on the parking brake lever.
Parking brake stroke: 7 8 notches / 44 lbs (196 N, 20 kg)
A safe location and situation should be select- ed for break-in driving.
Pulling the parking brake lever too forcefully may cause the rear wheels to lock. To avoid this, be certain to pull the lever up slowly and gently.
Parking brake stroke
Check the parking brake stroke according to the main- tenance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. When the parking brake is properly adjusted, braking power is fully applied by pulling the lever up seven to eight notches gently but firmly (about 44 lbs, 196 N, 20 kg). If the parking brake lever stroke is not within the specified range, have the brake system checked and adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.
HS7014CA
11-43
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
Tires and wheels
Types of tires You should be familiar with type of tires present on your vehicle.
All season tires The factory-installed tires on your new vehicle are all season tires. All season tires are designed to provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking perfor- mance in year-round driving including snowy and icy road conditions. However all season tires do not offer as much traction performance as winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow or on icy roads. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/ or M+S (Mud & Snow) on the tire sidewall.
Summer tires Summer tires are high-speed capability tires best suit- ed for highway driving under dry conditions. Summer tires are inadequate for driving on slippery roads such as on snow-covered or icy roads. If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered or icy roads, we strongly recommend the use of winter (snow) tires. When installing winter tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
Winter (snow) tires Winter tires are best suited for driving on snow-cov- ered and icy roads. However winter tires do not per- form as well as summer tires and all season tires on roads other than snow-covered and icy roads.
Tire inspection Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from se- rious damage, nails, and stones. At the same time, check the tires for abnormal wear. Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately if you find any problem.
NOTE When the wheels and tires strike curbs or are
subjected to harsh treatment as when the vehicle is driven on a rough surface, they can suffer dam- age that cannot be seen with the naked eye. This type of damage does not become evident until time has passed. Try not to drive over curbs, pot- holes or on other rough surfaces. If doing so is un- avoidable, keep the vehicles speed down to a walking pace or less, and approach the curbs as squarely as possible. Also, make sure the tires are not pressed against the curb when you park the vehicle.
If you feel unusual vibration while driving or find
11-44
Maintenance and service
it difficult to steer the vehicle in a straight line, one of the tires and/or wheels may be damaged. Drive slowly to the nearest authorized SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected.
Tire pressures and wear Maintaining the correct tire pressures helps to maxi- mize the tires service lives and is essential for good running performance. Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month (for example, during a fuel stop) and be- fore any long journey.
Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use
a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire placard. The tire placard is lo- cated on the door pillar on the drivers side.
Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire pressures. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the outside temperature. It is best to check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehi- cle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands, causing the tire pressure to increase. Be careful not to mistakenly release air from a warm tire to reduce its pressure.
NOTE The air pressure in a tire increases by approxi-
mately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm.
The tires are considered cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or has been driven less than one mile (1.6 km).
Do not let air out of warm tires to adjust press- rue. Doing so will result in low tire pressure.HS8024BA
11-45
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
Incorrect tire pressures detract from controllability and ride comfort, and they cause the tires to wear abnor- mally.
Correct tire pressure (tread worn evenly)
Roadholding is good, and steering is responsive. Roll- ing resistance is low, so fuel consumption is also low- er.
Abnormally low tire pressure (tread worn at shoulders)
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel consumption is also higher.HSB052AA
HSB053AA
11-46
Maintenance and service
Abnormally high tire pressure (tread worn in cen- ter)
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire magnifies the ef- fects of road-surface bumps and dips, possibly result- ing in vehicle damage.
If the tire placard shows tire pressures for the vehicle when fully loaded and for the vehicle when towing a trailer, adjust the tire pressures to the values that match current loading conditions.
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severe-
ly and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.
Wheel balance Each wheel was correctly balanced when your vehicle was new, but the wheels will become unbalanced as the tires become worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at certain vehicle speeds and detracts from the vehicles straight-line stability. It can also cause steering and suspension system problems and abnormal tire wear. If you suspect that the wheels are not correctly bal- anced, have them checked and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer. Also have them adjusted after tire re- pairs and after tire rotation.
NOTE Loss of correct wheel alignment* causes the tires to wear on one side and reduces the vehicles run- ning stability. Contact your SUBARU dealer if you notice abnormal tire wear. *: The suspension system is designed to hold each wheel at a certain alignment (relative to the other wheels and to the road) for optimum straight-line stability and cornering perfor-
HSB054AA
11-47
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
mance.
Wear indicators
A) New tread B) Worn tread C) Tread wear indicator
Each tire incorporates a tread wear indicator, which becomes visible when the depth of the tread grooves decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be re- placed when the tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.
When a tires tread wear indicator becomes vis- ible, the tire is worn beyond the acceptable limit and must be replaced immediately. With a tire in this condition, driving at high speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane. The resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an accident.
NOTE For safety, inspect tire tread regularly and replace the tires before their tread wear indicators become visible.
A C B
HSB055BC
11-48
Maintenance and service
Tire rotation
Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To maximize the life of each tire and ensure that the tires wear uniform- ly, it is best to rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,500 km). Rotating the tires involves switching the front and rear tires on the right hand side of the vehicle and similarly switching the front and rear tires on the left hand side of the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept on its original side of the vehicle.) Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the time of rotation. After tire rotation, adjust the tire pres- sures and make sure the wheel nuts are correctly tightened.
After driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again and retighten any nut that has become loose.
Tire replacement The wheels and tires are important and integral parts of your vehicles design; they cannot be changed arbi- trarily. The tires fitted as standard equipment are opti- mally matched to the characteristics of the vehicle and were selected to give the best possible combination of running performance, ride comfort, and service life. It is essential for every tire to have a size and construc- tion matching those shown on the tire placard and to have a speed symbol and load index matching those shown on the tire placard.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts from con- trollability, ride comfort, braking performance, speed- ometer accuracy and odometer accuracy. It also cre- ates incorrect body-to-tire clearances and inappropri- ately changes the vehicles ground clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of manufactur- er, brand (tread pattern), construction, and size. You are advised to replace the tires with new ones that are identical to those fitted as standard equipment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU recommends re-
HSB056BA
11-49
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
placing all four tires at the same time.
All four tires must be the same in terms of manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), construc- tion, degree of wear, speed symbol, load index and size. Mixing tires of different types, sizes or degrees of wear can result in damage to vehi- cles power train. Use of different types or sizes of tires can also dangerously reduce controlla- bility and braking performance and can lead to an accident.
Use only radial tires. Do not use radial tires together with belted bias tires and/or bias-ply tires. Doing so can dangerously reduce control- lability, resulting in an accident.
Wheel replacement When replacing wheels due, for example, to damage, make sure the replacement wheels match the specifi- cations of the wheels that are fitted as standard equip- ment. Replacement wheels are available from SUBARU dealers.
Use only those wheels that are specified for your vehicle. Wheels not meeting specifica- tions could interfere with brake caliper opera- tion and may cause the tires to rub against the wheel well housing during turns. The resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an acci- dent.
11-50
Maintenance and service
Aluminum wheels (if equipped) Aluminum wheels can be scratched and damaged easily. Handle them carefully to maintain their appear- ance, performance, and safety.
When any of the wheels is removed and replaced for tire rotation or to change a flat, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to the specified torque.
Never apply oil to the threaded parts, wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the wheel.
Never let the wheel rub against sharp protrusions or curbs.
Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformly and completely around the tire, otherwise the chains may scratch the wheel.
When wheel nuts, balance weights, or the center cap is replaced, be sure to replace them with genuine SUBARU parts designed for aluminum wheels.
Windshield washer fluid
Check the level of the washer fluid at each fuel stop. If the level is low, fill the fluid up to the neck of the reser- voir. Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield washer fluid is unavailable use clean water. In areas where water freezes in winter, use an anti- freeze type windshield washer fluid. SUBARU Wind- shield Washer Fluid contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temper- ature varies according to how much it is diluted, as in- dicated in the following table.
HSB018IA
11-51
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
Never use engine coolant as washer fluid be- cause it could cause paint damage.
Replacement of wiper blades Grease, wax, insects, or other material on the wind- shield or the wiper blade results in jerky wiper opera- tion and streaking on the glass. If you cannot remove the streaks after operating the windshield washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield (or rear window) and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the wind- shield and wiper blades with clean water. The wind- shield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water.
Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzene. This will cause deterioration of the wiper blades.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after follow- ing this method, replace the wiper blades using the fol- lowing procedures:
Washer Fluid Concentration Freezing Temperature
30% 10.4F (12C)
50% 4F (20C)
100% 49F (45C)
11-52
Maintenance and service
Windshield wiper blades 1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
A) Stopper
2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by holding its pivot area and pushing it in the direction shown by the arrow while depressing the wiper blade stopper.
A) Metal support
3. Grasp the locked end of the blade rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the stoppers on the rubber are free of the metal support.
A
UGB133BC
A
HSB059BC
11-53
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
A) Metal spines
4. If the new blade rubber is not provided with two metal spines, remove the metal spines from the old blade rubber and install them in the new blade rubber.
5. Align the claws of the metal support with the grooves in the rubber and slide the blade rubber as- sembly into the metal support until it locks.
A
HSB060BC HSB061BA
11-54
Maintenance and service
A) Stopper
Be sure to position the claws at the end of the metal support between the stoppers on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is not retained properly, the wiper blade may scratch the windshield. 6. Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place. 7. Lower the wiper arm.
Rear window wiper blade 1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear window.
2. Turn the wiper blade assembly counterclockwise.
A
HSB062BC
USB581BA
11-55
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
3. Having turned the wiper blade assembly to the an- gle shown in the illustration, pull it in the direction of the arrow to remove it from the wiper arm.
A) Plastic support
4. Pull out the end of the blade rubber assembly to un- lock it from the plastic support.
USB582BA
A
USB585BC
11-56
Maintenance and service
5. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of the plastic support.
A) Metal spines
6. If the new blade rubber is not provided with two metal spines, remove the metal spines from the old blade rubber and install them in the new blade rubber.
USB586BA
A
USB583BC
11-57
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
7. Align the claws of the plastic support with the grooves in the blade rubber assembly, then slide the blade rubber assembly into place.
Securely lock the end of the plastic support as shown in the illustration. If the rubber is not retained properly, the wiper may scratch the rear window glass. 8. Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place. 9. Lower the wiper arm.
USB586CA USB584BA
11-58
Maintenance and service
Battery
Before beginning work on or near any bat- tery, be sure to extinguish all cigarettes, match- es, and lighters. Never expose a battery to an open flame or electric sparks. Batteries give off a gas which is highly flammable and explosive.
For safety, in case an explosion does occur, wear eye protection or shield your eyes when working near any battery. Never lean over a bat- tery.
Do not let battery fluid contact eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint because battery fluid is a cor- rosive acid. If battery fluid gets on your skin or in your eyes, immediately flush the area with water thoroughly. Seek medical help immedi- ately if acid has entered the eyes. If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, imme- diately drink a large amount of milk or water, and seek medical attention immediately.
To lessen the risk of sparks, remove rings, metal watchbands, and other metal jewelry. Never allow metal tools to contact the positive battery terminal and anything connected to it WHILE you are at the same time in contact with
any other metallic portion of the vehicle be- cause a short circuit will result.
Keep everyone including children away from the battery.
Charge the battery in a well-ventilated area. Battery posts, terminals and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds, chemi- cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling.
11-59
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
A) Cap B) Upper level C) Lower level
It is unnecessary to periodically check the battery fluid level or periodically refill with distilled water. However, if the battery fluid level is below the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the upper level with dis- tilled water.
Never use more than 10 amperes when charg- ing the battery because it will shorten battery
life.
UPPER LEVELLOWER LEVEL
A
B
C UGB117BC
11-60
Maintenance and service
Fuses
Never replace a fuse with one having a higher rating or with material other than a fuse be- cause serious damage or a fire could result.
The fuses are designed to melt during an overload to prevent damage to the wiring harness and electrical equipment. The fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
One is located under the instrument panel behind the coin tray on the drivers seat side.
To remove the coin tray, open the cover and pull the coin tray out.
The other one is housed in the engine compartment.
HSB064BA
HSB065BA
11-61
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
A) Fuse puller B) Spare fuse
The fuse puller and spare fuses are stored in the main fuse box cover in the engine compartment.
A) Good B) Blown
If any lights, accessories or other electrical controls do not operate, inspect the corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace it. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and turn off all electrical accessories. 2. Remove the cover. 3. Determine which fuse may be blown. The back side of each fuse box cover and the Fuses and circuits section in chapter 12 in this manual show the circuit for each fuse.
A
B HSB066BC
A B
HSB067BB
11-62
Maintenance and service
A) Fuse puller
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller. 5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, replace it with a spare fuse of the same rating. 6. If the same fuse blows again, this indicates that its system has a problem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
Main fuse
Main fuse box
The main fuses are designed to melt during an over- load to prevent damage to the wiring harness and electrical equipment. Check the main fuses if any elec- trical component fails to operate (except the starter motor) and other fuses are good. A melted main fuse must be replaced. Use only replacements with the same specified rating as the melted main fuse. If a main fuse blows after it is replaced, have the electrical system checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
A
HSB068BC
HSB065BA
11-63
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
Installation of accessories Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing fog lights or any other electrical equipment in your ve- hicle. Such accessories may cause the electronic sys- tem to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if they are not suited for the vehicle.
Replacing bulbs
4321
567
8 9
10 11 12 13
14 HSB069BB
11-64
Maintenance and service
Headlight
Halogen headlight bulbs become very hot while in use. If you touch the bulb surface with bare hands or greasy gloves, finger prints or grease on the bulb surface will develop into hot spots and cause the bulb to break. If there are finger prints or grease on the bulb surface, wipe them away with a soft cloth moistened with alcohol.
NOTE If headlight aiming is required, consult your SUBARU dealer for proper adjustment of the head- light aim.
Wattage Bulb No. 1) Headlight 12V-60/
55W HB2 (H4)
2) Parking light 12V-5W 168 3) Map light 12V-8W 4) Dome light 12V-8W 5) Side marker light
(Front) 12V-5W 168
6) Front turn signal 12V-21W (Amber)
1474
7) Front fog light 12V-55W 8) High mount stop light 12V-13W 912 9) Cargo area light 12V-15W
10) Tail/stop light 12V-21/ 5W
7443
11) Rear turn signal 12V-21W (Amber)
1474
12) Backup light 12V-16W 921 13) Tail/stop light 12V-21/
5W 7443
14) License plate light 12V-5W 168
11-65
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
0
A) Rubber cover B) Electrical connector C) Top mark
1. Disconnect the electrical connector, then remove the rubber cover.
A) Retainer spring B) Bulb
2. Remove the retainer spring. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly.
HSB070BC
A
B
C B
A
HSB071BC
11-66
Maintenance and service
3. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly. 4. Install the new bulb, then set the retainer spring se- curely. 5. Install the rubber cover with the top mark facing up, then reconnect the electrical connector.
Front turn signal, side marker light and parking lights
A) Front turn signal light B) Parking light C) Front side marker light
The headlight assembly must be removed before the parking light and front turn signal light bulbs can be re- placed. When the headlight assembly has been re- moved and then reinstalled, it may become necessary to make a headlight aiming adjustment. It may be dif- ficult to replace the bulbs. Have your SUBARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary.
HSB072BA
AC
B
HSB073BC
11-67
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
: Clip : Hook
0
1. Remove the front grille. Use a screwdriver to de- tach the four clips at the top and the three hooks on the left, right and center.
HSB074BA HSB075BA
11-68
Maintenance and service
2. Remove the grille side cover by undoing the two clips and sliding the grille side cover toward the head- light.
3. Remove three bolts.
HSB076BA HSB078BA
11-69
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
A) Rubber cover B) Electrical connector C) Top mark
4. Disconnect the connectors from the headlight as- sembly.
5. Pull the headlight assembly slightly toward you, then hold down the lock release tabs on the connec- tors for the front turn signal light, parking light, and front side marker light and pull out the headlight as- sembly completely.
HSB070BC
A
B
C
HSB079BA
11-70
Maintenance and service
6. Remove the bulb socket from the headlight assem- bly by turning it counterclockwise.
7. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb. 8. Set the bulb socket into the headlight assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks. 9. Reinstall all the removed parts by following the re- moval sequence in reverse.
Front fog light It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have your SUBARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary.
Rear combination lights 1. Remove the upper and lower screws. Then, slide the rear combination lamp assembly to the rear and
HSB073CA HSB080BA
11-71
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
remove it from the vehicle.
A) Tail/stop light B) Rear turn signal light C) Backup light D) Tail/stop light
2. Remove the bulb holder from the rear combination light assembly by turning it counterclockwise. 3. Pull the bulb from the holder. Install a new bulb. 4. Set the bulb holder into the rear combination light assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks. 5. Reinstall the rear combination light assembly.
HSB085BA
C
B
A
D HSB086BC
11-72
Maintenance and service
License plate light 0
1. Remove the mounting screws using a Phillips screwdriver. 2. Remove the cover and lens. 3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb. 4. Reinstall the lens and cover. 5. Tighten the mounting screws.
Dome light, map light and cargo area light
Dome light
HSB087BA
HSB088BA
11-73
Maintenance and service
CONTINUED
Map light Cargo area light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of the lens with a flat-head screwdriver. 2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb. 3. Reinstall the lens.
HSB089BA HSB090BA
11-74
Maintenance and service
High mount stop light 0
1. Remove the mounting screw covers by prying the edge with a flat-head screwdriver. 2. Remove the mounting screws using a Phillips screwdriver and then remove the high mount stop light cover. 3. Pull the bulb from the socket. Install a new bulb. 4. Reinstall the cover. 5. Tighten the mounting screws then reinstall the cov- ers.
NOTE Other bulbs may be difficult to replace. Have your SUBARU dealer replace these bulbs if necessary.
HSB091BA
12-1
12
Specifications
Specifications ................................................ 12-2 Dimensions ....................................................... 12-2 Engine ................................................................ 12-3 Electrical system .............................................. 12-3 Capacities .......................................................... 12-4 Tires ................................................................... 12-5 Wheel alignment ............................................... 12-5
Fuses and circuits ........................................ 12-6 Fuse panel located behind the coin tray ........ 12-6 Fuse panel located in the engine
compartment .................................................. 12-8 Bulb chart ...................................................... 12-9 Vehicle identification .................................... 12-10
12-2
Specifications
SpecificationsSpecifications These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Dimensions in (mm)
*1: Measured with vehicle empty AT: Automatic transmission MT: Manual transmission
Item 2.5-liter non-turbo models 2.5-liter turbo models Drive system AWD Transmission type AT MT AT MT Overall length 175.2 (4,450) Overall width 68.3 (1,735) Overall height 62.6 (1,590) 62.4 (1,585) Wheel base 99.4 (2,525) Tread Front 58.9 (1,495)
Rear 58.5 (1,485) Ground clearance*1 7.5 (190) 7.7 (195)
12-3
Specifications
CONTINUED
Engine
Electrical system
Engine model EJ253 (2.5-liter, SOHC, non-turbo) EJ255 (2.5-liter, DOHC, turbo) Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine Displacement cu in (cc) 150 (2,457) Bore Stroke in (mm) 3.92 3.11 (99.5 79.0) Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.2 : 1 Firing order 1 3 2 4
Battery type and capacity (5HR)
Manual transmission 12V-48AH (55D23L) Automatic transmission 12V-52AH (75D23L)
Alternator 12V-90A Spark plugs 2.5-liter non-turbo models FR5AP-11 (NGK)
2.5-liter turbo models ILFR6B (NGK)
12-4
Specifications
Capacities
AT: Automatic transmission MT: Manual transmission
Fuel tank 15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal) Engine oil 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt) Transmission oil MT 3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt)
AT 9.8 US qt (9.3 liters, 8.2 Imp qt) AT differential gear oil 1.3 US qt (1.2 liter, 1.1 Imp qt) Rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt) Power steering gear fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt) Engine coolant 2.5-liter non-turbo
models MT 7.3 US qt (6.9 liters, 6.1 Imp qt) AT 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt)
2.5-liter turbo models MT 7.8 US qt (7.4 liters, 6.5 Imp qt) AT 7.7 US qt (7.3 liters, 6.4 Imp qt)
12-5
Specifications
CONTINUED
Tires
Wheel alignment
Tire size P215/60R16 94H Wheel size 16 61/2 JJ Pressure Front Light load 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2)
Full load 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2) Rear Light load 28 psi (190 kPa, 1.9 kgf/cm2)
Full load 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2) Trailer towing 41 psi (280 kPa, 2.8 kgf/cm2)
Item 2.5-liter non-turbo models 2.5-liter turbo models Drive system AWD Toe Front 0 0.12 in (0 3 mm)
Rear 0.08 0.12 in (2 3 mm) Camber Front 025 45
Rear 050 45 055 45
12-6
Specifications
Fuses and circuits
Fuse panel located behind the coin tray
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 212223
HSC001BB
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
1 15A Heater fan
2 15A Heater fan
3 15A Power door lock Remote keyless entry
4 15A Cigarette lighter Remote controlled rear view mirrors
5 10A Tail light Parking light
6 15A SRS airbag
7 15A Fog light
8 30A ABS Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system (models with Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system only)
9 15A Radio
10 Empty
12-7
Specifications
CONTINUED
11 15A Engine ignition system SRS airbag AT control system
12 10A Illumination brightness control
13 20A Wiper deicer Outside mirror defogger
14 10A Meter
15 30A Windshield wiper and washer
16 20A Brake light
17 15A Air conditioner
18 15A Backup light Cruise control
19 15A Power outlet (cargo)
20 10A Rear window wiper and washer
21 15A Ignition coil (Non-turbo model only)
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
22 15A Seat heater
23 Empty
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
12-8
Specifications
Fuse panel located in the engine com- partment
A) FWD socket (AT models without Vehicle Dynamics Control system)
B) Main fuse
A
1 2
4
3
B
5
6
7 8 9
10 11 12 13
USC003BB
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
1 30A Radiator cooling fan (Main)
2 30A Radiator cooling fan (Sub)
3 50A Vehicle Dynamics Control system (Mod- els with Vehicle Dy- namics Control system only)
30A Engine sensor (Non- turbo models only)
4 30A ABS motor
5 20A Rear window defogger
6 15A Hazard warning flasher Horn
7 15A Turn signal lights
8 10A Automatic transmis- sion control unit
9 10A Alternator
12-9
Specifications
CONTINUED
Bulb chart 10 15A Headlight (right side)
11 15A Headlight (left side)
12 20A Lighting switch
13 15A Clock Interior light
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
Description Wattage Bulb type Headlight 12V-60/55W HB2 Front fog light 12V-55W Front turn signal 12V-21W 1474 Parking light 12V-5W 168 Side marker light (Front) 12V-5W 168 Rear combination light
Tail/stop light 12V-21/5W 7443 Turn signal 12V-21W
(Amber) 1474
Tail/stop light 12V-21/5W 7443 Back-up light 12V-16W 921
High mount stop light 12V-13W 912 License plate light 12V-5W 168 Cargo compartment light 12V-5W Front ashtray light 12V-1.4W Doom light 12V-8W Map light 12V-8W
12-10
Specifications
Vehicle identification
1
2 3
4
5
6
7 USC507BB
1) Vehicle identification number 2) Emission control label 3) Vehicle identification number
plate 4) Tire inflation pressure plate 5) Certification plate 6) Bar cord label (U.S. only) 7) Model number plate
13-1
13
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Tire information ............................................. 13-2 Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2 Recommended tire inflation pressure ............ 13-5 Glossary of tire terminology ............................ 13-7 Tire care maintenance and
safety practices .............................................. 13-8 Vehicle load limit how to determine ............. 13-9 Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle
load capacities ............................................... 13-13 Adverse safety consequences of overloading
on handling and stopping and on tires ........ 13-14 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit ..... 13-14
Uniform tire quality grading standards ....... 13-15 Treadwear .......................................................... 13-15 Traction AA, A, B, C .......................................... 13-15 Temperature A, B, C ......................................... 13-16
Reporting safety defects (USA) ................... 13-17
13-2
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Consumer information and Reporting safety defectsFor U.S.A. The following information has been compiled accord- ing to Code of Federal Regulations Title 49, Part 575.
Tire information
Tire labeling Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire Identification Number or TIN) are placed on the sidewall of a tire by tire manufacturers. These marking can provide you with useful information on the tire.
Tire size Your vehicle comes equipped with P-Metric tire size. It is important to understand the sizing sys- tem in selecting the proper tire for your vehicles. Here is a brief review of the tire sizing system with a breakdown of its individual elements.
P Metric With the P-Metric system, Section Width is mea- sured in millimeters. To convert millimeters into inches, divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio (Sec- tion Height divided by Section Width) helps pro-
vide more dimensional information about the tire size.
Example:
(1) P = Certain tire type used on light duty vehi- cles such as passenger cars (2) Section Width in millimeters (3) Aspect Ratio (= section height section width). (4) R = Radial Construction (5) Rim diameter in inches
Load and Speed Rating Descriptions The load and speed rating descriptions will ap- pear following the size designation. They provide two important facts about the tire. First, the number designation is its load index. Second, the letter designation indicates the tires speed rating.
P 215 / 60 R 16 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
13-3
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
CONTINUED
Example:
(6) Load Index: A numerical code which speci- fies the maximum load a tire can carry at the speed indicated by its speed symbol, at maxi- mum inflation pressure. For example, 94 means 1,477 lbs (670 kg).
Load indices apply only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a load rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be loaded up to the tires rated load.
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical system de- scribing a tires capability to travel at established and predetermined speeds. For example, H means 130 mph (210 km/h)
Speed ratings apply only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a speed rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be operated at the tires rated speed.
The speed rating is void if the tires are worn out, damaged, repaired, retreaded, or otherwise altered from their original condi- tion. If tires are repaired, retreaded, or oth- erwise altered, they may not be suitable for original equipment tire designed loads and speeds.
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire Identification Number (TIN) is marked on the intended outboard sidewall. The TIN is com- posed of four groups. Here is a brief review of the TIN with a breakdown of its individual elements.
(1) Manufacturers Identification Mark
P 215 / 60 R 16 94 H Size designation (6) (7)
DOT XX XX XXX XXXX (1) (2) (3) (4)
13-4
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
(2) Tire Size (3) Tire Type Code (4) Date of Manufacture The first two figures identify the week, starting with 01 to represent the first full week of the cal- endar year; the second two figures represent the year. For example, 0101 means the 1st week of 2001.
Other markings The following makings are also placed on the sidewall.
Maximum permissible inflation pressure The maximum cold inflation pressure to which this tire may be inflated. For example, 300 kpa (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS
Maximum load rating The load rating at the maximum permissible weight load for this tire. For example, MAX. LOAD 670 kg (1477 LBS) @ 300 kpa (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS.
Maximum load rating applies only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a load rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehi- cle can be loaded up to the tires rated load.
Construction type Applicable construction of this tire. For example, TUBELESS STEEL BELTED RA- DIAL
Construction The generic name of each cord material used in the plies (both sidewall and tread area) of this tire. For example, PLIES: SIDEWALL POLYESTER 1 TREAD POLYESTER 1 + STEEL 2 + NYLON 1
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) For details, refer to Uniform tire quality grading standards in this chapter.
13-5
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
CONTINUED
Recommended tire inflation pressure Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
Recommended cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicles tires is as follows,
Tire size P215/60R16 94H Wheel size 16 6 1/2 JJ Pressure Front Light load 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2)
Full load 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2) Rear Light load 28 psi (190 kPa, 1.9 kgf/cm2)
Full load 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2) Trailer towing 41 psi (280 kPa, 2.8 kgf/cm2)
13-6
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Vehicle placard
The vehicle placard is affixed to the drivers side door pillar.
Example:
The vehicle placard shows original tire size, rec- ommended cold tire inflation pressure on each tire at maximum loaded vehicle weight, seating capacity and loading information.
Adverse safety consequences of under-in- flation
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause the tires to flex severely and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and failure of the tire(s). Possible resulting loss of ve-
USD508BA KL
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
SEATING CAPACITY : TOTAL 5
ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE
SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSRE
COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSRE
FRONT
REAR
200kPa,29PSI
190kPa,28PSI P215/60R16
P215/60R16 200kPa, 29PSI
SPARE TIRE
The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 408kg or 900lbs.
FRONT 2 : REAR 3
USD507AA
13-7
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
CONTINUED
hicle control could lead to an accident.
Measuring and adjusting air pressure to achieve proper inflation
Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month and before any long journey. Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the specific values. Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire pres- sures. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the outside temperature. It is best to check tire pres- sure outdoors before driving the vehicle. When a tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands, causing the tire pressure to increase. Be careful not to mistakenly release air from a warm tire to reduce its pressure.
Glossary of tire terminology Cold tire pressure
The pressure in a tire that has been driven less than 1 mile or has been standing for three hours or more.
Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure recommended by a vehicle manufacturer.
Intended outboard sidewall 1)The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or 2)The outward facing sidewall of an asymmet- rical tire that has a particular side that must al- ways face outward when mounting on a vehi- cle. Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those stan- dard items which may be replaced) of floor mats, leather seats and cross bars to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not).
Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fu- el, oil, and coolant and air conditioning.
13-8
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehi- cle capacity weight and production options weight.
Normal occupant weight 150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of occupants (3 occupants).
Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle, 2 in front, 1 in rear seat.
Production options weight The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in excess of those standards items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight.
Vehicle capacity weight The total weight of cargo, luggage and occu- pants that can be added to the vehicle.
Vehicle maximum load on a tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maxi- mum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two.
Vehicle normal load on a tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and dividing by two.
Tire care maintenance and safety practices
Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from serious damage, nails, and stones. At the same time, check the tires for abnormal wear.
Inspect the tire tread regularly and replace the tires before their tread wear indicators become visible. When a tires tread wear indicator be- comes visible, the tire is worn beyond the ac- ceptable limit and must be replaced immediately. With a tire in this condition, driving at even low speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane. Possible resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an accident.
To maximize the life of each tire and ensure that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,500 km). Rotating the tires involves switching the front and rear tires on the right hand side of the vehicle and similarly switching the front and rear tires on the
13-9
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
CONTINUED
left hand side of the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept on its original side of the vehicle.) Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the time of rotation. After tire rotation, adjust the tire pres- sures and make sure the wheel nuts are correct- ly tightened. A tightening torque specification and a tightening sequence specification for the wheel nuts can be found Flat tires in Chapter 9.
Vehicle load limit how to determine The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. The load limit of your vehicle is shown on the vehicle placard attached to the drivers side B-pillar. Lo- cate the statement The combined weight of oc- cupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicles placard. The vehicle placard also shows seating capacity of your vehicle. The total load capacity includes the total weight of driver and all passengers and their belong- ings, any cargo, any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a trailer. Therefore cargo ca- pacity can be calculated by the following method.
Cargo capacity = Load limit (total weight of oc- cupants + total weight of optional equipment + tongue load of a trailer (if applicable))
For towing capacity information and weight lim- its, refer to Trailer towing in Chapter 8.
Calculating total and load capacities vary- ing seating configurations
Calculate the available load capacity as shown in the following examples:
Example 1A
Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 900 lbs
USD503BA
13-10
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
(408 kg), which is indicated on the vehicle plac- ard with the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 900 lbs or 408 kg.
For example, if the vehicle has one occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg) plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300 kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capacity by sub- tracting the total weight from the vehicle capacity weight of 900 lbs (408 kg).
3. The result of step 2 shows that a further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can be carried.
Example 1B
For example, if a person weighing 176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same vehicle (bringing the
Total weight
= 154 lbs (70 kg) + 662 lbs (300 kg)
= 816 lbs (370 kg) (Occupant) (Cargo)
Available Load Capacity
= 900 lbs (408 kg) 816 lbs (370 kg)
= 84 lbs (38 kg)
(Vehicle capacity weight)
(Total weight)
USD504BA
13-11
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
CONTINUED
number of occupants to two), the calculations are as follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42 kg), so the cargo weight must be reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.
Example 2A
Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is indicated on the vehicle plac- ard with the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 408 kg or 900 lbs.
For example, the vehicle has one occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg) plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170 kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs (10 kg), to which is attached a trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of the trailer weight is applied to
Total weight
= 154 lbs (70 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)
+ 662 lbs (300 kg)
= 992 lbs (450 kg)
(Occupant)
(Cargo)
Available Load Capacity
= 900 lbs (408 kg) 992 lbs (450 kg)
= 92 lbs (42 kg)
(Vehicle capacity weight)
(Total weight)
USD505BA
13-12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capacity.
3. The result of step 2 shows that a further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can be carried.
Example 2B
For example, if a person weighing 143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing 40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same vehicle (bringing the number of occu- pants to three), and a child restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5 kg) is installed in the vehicle for the child to use, the calculations are as fol- lows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
Total weight
= 165 lbs (75 kg) + 375 lbs (170 kg)
+ 22 lbs (10 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)
= 738 lbs (335 kg)
(Occupant) (Cargo)
(Trailer hitch) (Tongue load)
Available Load Capacity
= 900 lbs (408 kg) 738 lbs (335 kg)
= 162 lbs (73 kg)
(Vehicle capacity weight)
(Total weight)
USD506BA
13-13
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
CONTINUED
2. Calculate the available load capacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds the capacity weight by 32 lbs (15 kg), so the cargo weight must be reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more.
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load capacities
The sum of four tires maximum load ratings must exceed the maximum loaded vehicle weight (GVWR). In addition, sum of the maxi- mum load ratings of two front tires and of two rear tires must exceed each axles maximum loaded capacity (GAWR). Original equipment tires are designed to fulfill those conditions. The maximum loaded vehicle weight is referred to Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). And each axles maximum loaded capacity is referred to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GVWR and each axles GAWR are shown on the vehicle certification label affixed to the drivers door. The GVWR and front and rear GAWRs are de- termined by not only the maximum load rating of tires but also loaded capacities of the vehicles suspension, axles and other body parts. Therefore, this means that the vehicle cannot necessarily be loaded up to the tires maximum load rating on the tire sidewall.
Total weight
= 165 lbs (75 kg) + 143 lbs (65 kg) + 40 lbs (18 kg)
+ 11 lbs (5 kg) + 375 lbs (170 kg)
+ 22 lbs (10 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)
= 932 lbs (423 kg)
(Occupant)
(Cargo)
(Trailer hitch)
(Child restraint)
(Tongue load)
Available Load Capacity
= 900 lbs (408 kg) 932 lbs (423 kg)
= 32 lbs (15 kg)
(Vehicle capacity weight)
(Total weight)
13-14
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Adverse safety consequences of over- loading on handling and stopping and on tires
Overloading could affect vehicle handling, stop- ping distance, vehicle and tire as shown below. This could lead to an accident and possibly result in severe personal injury.
Vehicle stability will deteriorate. Heavy and/or high-mounted loads could in-
crease the risk of rollover. Stopping distance will increase. Brakes could overheat and fail. Suspension, bearings, axles and other body
parts could break or experience accelerated wear that will shorten vehicle life.
Tires could fail. Tread separation could occur. Tire could separate from its rim.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicles placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs (635kg). and there will be five- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail- able cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available car- go and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehi- cle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
13-15
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
CONTINUED
Uniform tire quality grading stan- dards This information indicates the relative perfor- mance of passenger car tires in the area of treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. This is to aid the consumer in making an in- formed choice in the purchase of tires. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The quality grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars. However, they do not apply to deep tread, winter type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 12 inches or less, or to some limited production tires.
All passenger car tires must confirm to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov- ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1-1/2) times as well on the govern- ment course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as mea- sured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con- crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
13-16
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces- sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor- mance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- dards No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is es- tablished for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, un- derinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
13-17
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
CONTINUED
Reporting safety defects (USA)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in- jury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Admin- istration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Subaru of America, Inc. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Subaru of America, Inc. To con- tact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
14-1 14
Index
14-2
Index
A ABS ................................................................... 7-23
Warning light ........................................ 3-15, 7-24 Accessory power outlet ....................................... 6-9 Active head restraint ............................................ 1-9 Air cleaner element ......................................... 11-21 Air filtration system ............................................ 4-18 All-Wheel Drive .................................................. 3-19 Aluminum wheel .............................................. 11-50 Aluminum wheel cleaning .................................. 10-3 Antenna system .................................................. 5-2 Anti-lock brake system warning light
(ABS) .................................................... 3-15, 7-24 Arming the system ............................................. 2-17 Ashtray ..................................................... 6-14, 10-7 Audio set ............................................................. 5-3 Auto-dimming mirror/compass .......................... 3-35 Automatic climate control system ...................... 4-11 Automatic transmission ..................................... 7-15
Capacities ..................................................... 12-4 Fluid ............................................................ 11-29 Selector lever ................................................ 7-16 Shift lock release .......................................... 7-20 Temperature warning (AT OIL TEMP) .......... 3-15
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) .......................................................... 1-16
B Battery ............................................................. 11-58
Jump starting .................................................. 9-9 Replacing (remote keyless entry) ................. 2-11
Brake Booster ....................................................... 11-38 Fluid ............................................................ 11-36 Pad and lining ............................................. 11-41 Parking ....................................................... 11-42 Pedal .......................................................... 11-38 System ......................................................... 7-22 Warning light ................................................ 3-18
Brake pedal ..................................................... 11-38 Free play .................................................... 11-38 Reserve distance ........................................ 11-39
Braking .............................................................. 7-22 Braking tips ....................................................... 7-22 Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ..... 11-41 Bulb
Chart ............................................................. 12-9 Replacing ................................................... 11-63
C Capacities ......................................................... 12-4 Cargo area cover (if equipped) ......................... 6-16 Cargo area light ................................................... 6-2 Cargo tie-down hooks ....................................... 6-18
14-3
Index
Center console .................................................... 6-5 Charge warning light ......................................... 3-14 CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
indicator lamp ................................................ 3-13 Child restraint systems ...................................... 1-35
Installation with seatbelt ............................... 1-39 Top tether anchorages ................................. 1-50
Child safety locks .............................................. 2-23 Chime
Key ................................................................. 3-5 Seatbelt ............................................... 1-16, 3-13
Cigarette lighter socket ...................................... 6-11 Clock ................................................................. 3-22 Clutch (MT)
Fluid ............................................................ 11-37 Pedal .......................................................... 11-39
Coat hook .......................................................... 6-16 Coin tray .............................................................. 6-7 Convenience net ................................................. 6-7 Coolant ............................................................ 11-17 Cooling system ................................................ 11-16 Corrosion protection ................................. 8-12, 10-4 Cruise control .................................................... 7-38 Cruise control indicator light .............................. 3-21 Cup holders ......................................................... 6-8
D Dashboard storage compartment ........................ 6-6 Daytime running light system ............................ 3-25 Differential gear oil
Front (AT vehicles) ..................................... 11-31 Rear ............................................................ 11-33
Dimensions ........................................................ 12-2 Disarming the system ........................................ 2-19 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............ 7-23 Dome light ........................................................... 6-2 Door locks ........................................................... 2-6 Door open warning light .................................... 3-19 Drive belt ......................................................... 11-26 Driving in foreign country ..................................... 8-6 Driving tips .................................................. 7-14, 8-6
E Electronic brake force distribution (EBD)
system ........................................................... 7-26 Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................. 1-15 Engine
Compartment overview ................................. 11-8 Coolant ....................................................... 11-17 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .................... 8-3 Hood ............................................................. 11-5 Oil ............................................................... 11-10 Overheating .................................................. 9-12
14-4
Index
Starting ........................................................... 7-9 Stopping ....................................................... 7-12
Exterior care ...................................................... 10-2
F Flat tires .............................................................. 9-3 Floor mat ........................................................... 6-15 Fluid level
Automatic transmission .............................. 11-29 Brake .......................................................... 11-36 Clutch (MT vehicles) ................................... 11-37 Power steering ............................................ 11-34
Fog light button ................................................. 3-27 Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles) ............ 11-31 Front seatbelt pretensioners .............................. 1-31 Front seats .......................................................... 1-2
Fore and aft adjustment ........................... 1-3, 1-5 Reclining .................................................. 1-4, 1-7
Fuel ..................................................................... 7-2 Economy hints ................................................ 8-2 Filler lid and cap ............................................. 7-4 Gauge ............................................................. 3-9 Requirements ................................................. 7-2
Fuses .............................................................. 11-60 Fuses and circuits ............................................. 12-6
G GAWR ............................................................... 8-16 Glove box ............................................................ 6-5 Gross Axle Weight Rating ................................. 8-16 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ............................ 8-16 GVWR ............................................................... 8-16
H Hazard warning flasher ....................................... 3-7 Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-24 Headlights ......................................................... 3-23 Headrest adjustment ......................................... 1-12 Heater operation ................................................. 4-6 High beam indicator light ................................... 3-21 Hill holder ............................................... 7-36, 11-40 Horn .................................................................. 3-40
I Ignition switch ...................................................... 3-3 Illuminated entry ................................................ 2-11 Illumination brightness control ........................... 3-26 Immobilizer indicator light .................................... 2-5 Indicator light ..................................................... 3-12 Inside mirror ...................................................... 3-35 Interior lights ........................................................ 6-2
14-5
Index
J Jack and jack handle ......................................... 9-19 Jump starting ....................................................... 9-9
K Key
Number ........................................................... 2-3 Reminder chime ............................................. 3-5
Key interlock release (AT vehicles) ..................... 3-6 Keys .................................................................... 2-2
L Leather seat materials ....................................... 10-6 Light control switch ............................................ 3-23 Limited slip differential (LSD) ............................. 7-21 Loading your vehicle ......................................... 8-14 Low fuel warning light ........................................ 3-19 Lower and tether anchorages ............................ 1-45 LSD (limited slip differential) .............................. 7-21 Lumbar support ................................................... 1-7
M Main fuse ......................................................... 11-62 Maintenance
Precautions ................................................... 11-3 Schedule ....................................................... 11-3
Seatbelt ........................................................ 1-29 Tools ............................................................. 9-19
Malfunction indicator lamp ................................. 3-13 Manual
Climate control system ................................... 4-4 Seat ................................................................ 1-3 Transmission ................................................ 7-12 Transmission oil .......................................... 11-27
Map lights ............................................................ 6-3 Maximum load limits .......................................... 8-26 Meters and gauges .............................................. 3-7 Mirrors ............................................................... 3-35 Moonroof .................................................. 2-28, 9-18
N New vehicle break-in driving ............................... 8-2
O Odometer/Trip meter ........................................... 3-7 Off road driving .................................................... 8-8 Oil filter ............................................................ 11-11 Oil level
Engine ........................................................ 11-10 Manual transmission ................................... 11-27 Rear differential .......................................... 11-33
Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-15 Outside mirrors .................................................. 3-37
14-6
Index
Outside temperature indicator ........................... 3-11 Overhead console ............................................... 6-6
P Parking brake ......................................... 7-34, 11-42
Stroke ......................................................... 11-42 Parking light switch ............................................ 3-27 Parking your vehicle .......................................... 7-34 Periodic inspections ............................................ 8-5 Power
Door locking switches ..................................... 2-8 Seat ................................................................ 1-5 Steering ........................................................ 7-21 Steering fluid level ...................................... 11-34 Windows ....................................................... 2-24
R Rear
Combination lights ...................................... 11-70 Differential gear oil level ............................. 11-33 Gate ..................................................... 2-27, 9-17 Seats ............................................................ 1-11 Viscous limited slip differential (LSD) ........... 7-21
Rear window Defogger button ............................................ 3-33 Wiper and washer switch .............................. 3-31 Wiper blades ............................................... 11-54
Remote keyless entry system ............................. 2-9 Replacing
Air cleaner element .................................... 11-21 Battery (remote keyless entry) ..................... 2-11 Bulbs .......................................................... 11-63 Transmitters ................................................. 2-13
Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-14 Roof rail and crossbar ....................................... 8-17
S Seat height adjustment (drivers side) ................. 1-5 Seatbelt
Extender ....................................................... 1-29 Maintenance ................................................. 1-29 Pretensioners ............................................... 1-31 Safety tips ..................................................... 1-14 Warning light and chime ...................... 1-16, 3-13
Seatbelts ........................................................... 1-14 Seats
Fabric ........................................................... 10-6 Heater ........................................................... 1-10
Security system ................................................. 2-17 Selector lever (AT vehicles) .............................. 7-16 Self-leveling rear suspension ............................ 7-43 Shift lock release ............................................... 7-20 Shift position indicator ....................................... 3-20 Shopping bag hook ........................................... 6-18
14-7
Index
Snow tires .......................................................... 8-13 Snowy and icy roads ......................................... 8-11 Spark plugs ..................................................... 11-25 Specifications .................................................... 12-2 Speedometer ....................................................... 3-7 SRS
Airbag system warning light .......................... 3-13 Frontal airbag ............................................... 1-57 Side airbag ................................................... 1-65
SRS airbags ...................................................... 1-53 Steering wheel
Power ........................................................... 7-21 Tilt wheel ...................................................... 3-39
Storage compartments ........................................ 6-4 Sun visors ............................................................ 6-3 Supplemental Restraint System airbag ............. 1-53 Synthetic leather upholstery .............................. 10-6
T Tachometer ......................................................... 3-8 Temperature gauge ........................................... 3-10 Tie-down hooks ................................................. 9-13 Tilt steering wheel ............................................. 3-39 Tire
Chains .......................................................... 8-13 Inspection ................................................... 11-43 Pressures and wear .................................... 11-44
Replacement .............................................. 11-48 Rotation ...................................................... 11-48 Types .......................................................... 11-43
Top tether anchorages ...................................... 1-50 Towing ............................................................... 9-13
All wheels on the ground .............................. 9-15 Flat-bed truck ................................................ 9-15
Trailer Connecting .......................................... 8-23, 8-31 Hitch .................................................... 8-22, 8-30 Towing .......................................................... 8-25 Towing tips ................................................... 8-33
Turn signal indicator lights ................................. 3-21 Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-25
U Under-floor storage compartment ..................... 6-19
V Valet mode ........................................................ 2-20 Vanity mirror ........................................................ 6-4 Vehicle capacity weight ..................................... 8-16 Vehicle Dynamics Control ................................. 7-28 Vehicle identification ........................................ 12-10 Ventilator ............................................................. 4-2
14-8
Index
W Warning and indicator lights .............................. 3-12 Warning lights
ABS .............................................................. 3-15 All-Wheel Drive ............................................. 3-19 Anti-lock Brake system ................................. 3-15 AT OIL TEMPerature .................................... 3-15 Brake system ................................................ 3-18 Charge .......................................................... 3-14 CHECK ENGINE .......................................... 3-13 Door open ..................................................... 3-19 Low fuel ........................................................ 3-19 Oil pressure .................................................. 3-15 Seatbelt ............................................... 1-16, 3-13 SRS airbag system ....................................... 3-13 Vehicle Dynamics Control ............................ 3-16
Warranties and maintenance ............................ 8-25 Washing ............................................................ 10-2 Waxing and polishing ........................................ 10-3 Wear indicators ............................................... 11-47 Wheel
Alignment ..................................................... 12-5 Aluminum .................................................... 11-50 Balance ...................................................... 11-46 Replacement .............................................. 11-49
Windows ............................................................ 2-24
Windshield Washer fluid ............................................... 11-50 Wiper and washer switches .......................... 3-29 Wiper deicer ................................................. 3-32
Windshield wiper blades Replacement .............................................. 11-51
Winter driving .................................................... 8-10 Wiper and washer ............................................. 3-28
10
9 876
5
4
3
11
12
13
HSF028AA
GAS STATION REFERENCE Fuel:
Non-turbo models Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher.
Turbo models Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rat- ing of 91 AKI or higher. If premium unleaded gaso- line is not available, regular unleaded gasoline with octane rating of 87 AKI or higher may be temporarily used. For optimum engine performance and drive- ability, it is required that you use premium grade un- leaded gasoline.
Fuel octane rating This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Motor numbers and is commonly re-
ferred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI). Refer to Fu- el section in this manual.
Fuel capacity: 15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)
Engine oil: Use only API classification SL with the words EN- ERGY CONSERVING and the New API certification mark (starburst mark) displayed on the container (IL- SAC GF-3).
Engine oil capacity: 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
Cold tire pressur
Related manuals for Subaru Forester 2.5 XS L.L. Bean 2005 Owner's Manual
en
en
en
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the Forester Subaru works, you can view and download the Subaru Forester 2.5 XS L.L. Bean 2005 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Subaru Forester as well as other Subaru manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Subaru Forester. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Subaru Forester 2.5 XS L.L. Bean 2005 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Subaru Forester 2.5 XS L.L. Bean 2005 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Subaru Forester 2.5 XS L.L. Bean 2005 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Subaru Forester 2.5 XS L.L. Bean 2005 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Subaru Forester 2.5 XS L.L. Bean 2005 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.